1662 MANUAL OPERATOR.pdf
February 24, 2017 | Author: Tomas Kriukelis | Category: N/A
Short Description
Download 1662 MANUAL OPERATOR.pdf...
Description
Operator’ s Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC STM4/16 Compact Multiservice Node
1662SMC Rel.2.1
3AL 98104 ADAA Ed.01
RELATED TECHNICAL HANDBOOK:
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
1662SMC Rel. 2.1 Technical Handbook
3AL 98104 AAAA
SAFETY RULES Before carrying out any installation, turn-on, tests & operation and maintenance operations, read carefully the Safety Rules described in Technical Handbook’ s section HANDBOOK GUIDE.
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION (present edition) part
1 2 3 4 5
No pages
HANDBOOK GUIDE INTRODUCTION NE MANAGEMENT NE MAINTENANCE SIBDL
15 15 388 44 16
3AL 98104 ADAA Ed.01
Numbered From 1/15 1/15 1/388 1/44 1/16
to 15/15 15/15 388/388 44/44 16/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Handbook Guide
01
2004-05-21
Creation
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
Distribution: Internal
Edition
01
External
Ma Jing APPROVED BY
PREPARED BY
√
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
1/15
1
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3 1.1
General information· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·3
1.2
Handbook applicability· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·3
1.3
Purpose of the handbook · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·3
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.4 Handbook configuration check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·4 1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·4 2
PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
3
SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8 3.1
First aid for electric shock · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·8
3.2
Norms and labels · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·8
4
HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9
5
GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·12 5.1
Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·12
5.2
Handbook supply to Customers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·12
5.3
Aims of standard Customer Documentation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·12
5.4 Handbook Updating· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·12 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·13 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·13 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·13 5.5 Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·13 5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·14 5.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·14 5.5.3 CD-ROM identification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·15 5.5.4 CD-ROM updating· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·15
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
2/15
1
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1
General information WARNING
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. NOTICE The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent. 1.2
Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT 1662SMC
PRODUCT 1662SMC RELEASE Rel.2.1
ANV P/N 3AL 98001 AAAA VERSION(N.B.) ANV P/N -3AL 98002 ACAA
FACTORY P/N -FACTORY P/N --
For further information on the Alcatel software product and its physical distribution support refer to the “Introduction”section. N.B. NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “version”distributed to Customers implies man-machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s “version”marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the screen contents are unchanged. 1.3
Edition
Purpose of the handbook
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
3/15
This handbook describes the operations concerning commissioning, operation and maintenance that the operators must carry out as indicated by the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook (see Table 1.) and the 1320CT associated documentation (see Table 5.) does not replicate information contained into it. In particular, all cautions relevant to safety, rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from the Technical Handbook. When using this handbook it is assumed that the Operators know: • The structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment (product-release) this handbook refers to. • How to use a PC and the Windows ambient applications 1.4
Handbook configuration check
This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) that can have editions different from one another. The Edition of the whole handbook is that of section 1 (HANDBOOK GUIDE). The edition of the enclosed documents indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding original internal document. HANDBOOK EDITION REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE 2 INTRODUCTION MANUAL 3 NE MANAGEMENT MANUAL 4 MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5 SIBDL MANUAL
01 02 03 04 05 SECTION EDITION 01 01 01 01 01
1.4.1 Notes on Ed.01 Ed.01 issued on May 2004 is the first released and validated version of the handbook.
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
4/15
2
PRODUCT-RELEASE HANDBOOKS
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this Handbook. The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose productrelease- version is stated in para.1.2 consists of the following handbooks: Table 1. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware REF
[1]
[2]
[3]
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
THIS HDBK
1662SMC Rel.2.1 Technical 3AL 98104 AAAA Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance , Hardware setting documentation 1662SMC Rel.2.1 Installation 3AL 98104 ABAA Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment Installation 1662SMC Rel.2.1 3AL 98104 ACAA Turnup & Commissionig Handbook Provide information regarding Equipment Turn-On, Test and Operation
Table 2.Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control REF
[4]
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. --
THIS HDBK Or note
FACTORY Part No. 957.140.552 J
THIS HDBK Or note
1662SMC Rel.2.1 3AL 98104 ADAA CT Operator’s Handbook Provides 1662SMC “SDH”Craft Terminal screens and operational procedures
Table 3. Handbooks related to ATM specific product SW REF [5] [6]
Edition
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
ATM Rel.1.0 Operator’s 3AL 80730 AAAA Handbook ATM Rel.1.2 Operator’s 3AL 80814 AAAA 957.140.652 W Handbook Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
5/15
Table 4. Handbooks related to IP specific product SW REF
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
[7]
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 957.140.722 L
THIS HDBK Or note
IP Rel.1.0 3AL 81062 AAAA Operator’s Handbook Provides ATM SMART Terminal screens and operational procedures
Table 5. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform REF
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 957.130.542 E
THIS HDBK
1320CT 3AL 79186 AAAA [8] Basic Operator’s Handbook Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operator’s 3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A Handbook Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the [9] alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Information about Historical Alarms and Network Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft Terminal. They are only used by Network Management. ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’s 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E Handbook [10] Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package. Table 6. Documentation on CD-ROM REF CD-ROM TITLE
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
Edition
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
1662SMC Rel.2.1 CD-ROM3AL 98107AAAA DOC EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [1] to [4] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks 1320CT BASIC CD-ROM3AL 79549 AAAA 417.100.031 DOC EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [8] to [10] ATM Rel.1.1 CD-ROM DOC 3AL80739 AAAA 417.100.060 EN Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF. [5] Envisaged after the release of all handbooks ATM 1.2 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 80815 AAAA 417.100.068 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [6] 01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
6/15
[15]
IP 1.0 CD-ROM-DOC EN 3AL 81063 AAAA 417.100.084 Contains, in electronic format, the following handbook: REF. [7]
Table 7. Optional handbooks common to 16xxSM
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
REF
[16]
[17]
N.B.
Edition
HANDBOOK
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No. 955.100.692 N
THIS HDBK
S9-16xxSM 3AL 78901 AAAA System Installation Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the S9 Rack. Optinex RACK-16xxSM 3AL 38207 AAAA 955.110.202 L System Installation Handbook Provides general installation rules necessary to install the Optinex family equipment in the Optinex Rack. Handbooks REF. [16] and [17] are available only on paper support
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
7/15
3
SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
3.1
First aid for electric shock
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened. Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION It is important to start mouth-to-mouth resuscitation at once and seek doctor help immediately. TREATMENT OF BURNS This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present). WARNING: • Do not attempt to remove his clothing fro m the burnt parts; • Apply dry gauze on the burns; • Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
3.2
Norms and labels
Refer to the Technical Handbook associated to ALCATEL’s designed and manufactured equipment to obtain the following information: - COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. - SAFETY RULES • General rules • Harmful optical signals • Risk of explosion • Moving mechanical parts • Heat-radiating Mechanical Parts - ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGERS (ESD) - EQUIPMENT LABELS Identical or similar informa tion on Personal Computer, Work-Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s, loaded with software applicative described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructor’s technical documentation.
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
8/15
4
HANDBOOK DESCRIPTION
This handbook is composed of the following Manuals: SECTION 1: HANDBOOK GUIDE (This document)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Handbook Guide gives general information on the application and use of the Handbook. The Handbook Guide includes the following chapters: - Chapter 1:Handbook structure and configuration check. This chapter gives information on the whole handbook application, composition and evolution. - Chapter 2: Product-release handbooks. This chapter lists the handbooks the Operator should have in order to carry out the tasks allowed by the specific product-release this handbook refers to. - Chapter 3: Safety norms and labels - Chapter 4: Handbook description - Chapter 5: General on Alcatel Customer Documentation SECTION 2: INTRODUCTION Manual The Introduction Manual describes the main features of the graphical interface and provides a general overview of the system architecture and the different functionalities provided by the Craft Terminal. The Introduction Manual includes the following chapters: - Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. - Chapter 2: General description of the Craft Terminal. The Craft Terminal is introduced and the software product listed. The Craft Terminal main functionality in the NE management (EML-USM) are listed and briefly described. - Chapter 3: Acronyms and abbreviations. The acronyms used in all the operator manuals are listed. - Chapter 4: Glossary of terms. Definitions concerning the acronyms. SECTION 3: NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGEMENT Manual The aim of this document is to describe the Craft Terminal view, inserting operative information. The Network Element Manual includes the following chapters: - Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. - Chapter 2: General introduction on views and menus. The view organization is presented and the menus available listed and briefly described. - Chapter 3: NE management supervision. This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access. - Chapter 4: NE management general configuration. In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (CT access, NE Time, Alarm Configuration etc). - Chapter 5: Security Management. In this chapter configuration referred to the Security management are described (ACD level and Manager list). - Chapter 6: External input and output points management. This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm). Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
9/15
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- Chapter 7: Diagnosis management. In this chapter are specified: access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition, abnormal condition list (as result of operator’s command), access to the Event and Alarm Log file and Internal Link Monitor. - Chapter 8: Communication and Routing management. In this chapter are presented the communication and routing parameters, concerning the OSI and IP communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network - Chapter 9: Equipment management. This chapter deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. - Chapter 10: Board view. This chapter permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol), to access the port and to change the physical interface. - Chapter 11: Port view. This chapter permits to set and show the transmission resources referred to the Port. - Chapter 12: Equipment protection management. This chapter permits to manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration. - Chapter 13: Multiplex Section protection management. This chapter permits to manage the MSP protection. - Chapter 14: Transmission view. This chapter permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. - Chapter 15: Cross connection management. This chapter permits to manage the connection of the paths. - Chapter 16: Overhead management. This chapter permits to manage the Overhead, setting the relevant configuration. - Chapter 17: Performance Monitoring management. This chapter permits to set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. - Chapter 18: Synchronization management. This chapter permits to set and show Synchronization parameters and status. - Chapter 19: ATM/IP/ETH Configuration. This chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM boards creation and the ATM/IP/ETH TTPs creation. - Chapter 20: Software management. This chapter permits to update the NE by means download procedure and to manage NE software. SECTION 4: NETWORK ELEM ENT MAINTENANCE Manual This document aims at introducing the Maintenance procedure, inserting information useful to identify alarms and troubleshoot the NE. The Maintenance Manual includes the following chapters: - Chapter 1: Introduction. This chapter gives the structure of this manual. - Chapter 2: Maintenance introduction. List the maintenance steps. - Chapter 3: Maintenance of the Personal Computer. The Personal Computer manual is referred. - Chapter 4: Problems with Craft terminal. Shut Cdown and restart of the PC is indicated. - Chapter 5: Troubleshooting (Corrective Maintenance). Detection location and correction of failure are presented. - Chapter 6: Unit replacement with spare. The replacement procedure is detailed. - Chapter 7: Upgrading with New Hardware. The Hardware upgrading procedure is detailed. SECTION 5: SIBDL Manual
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
10/15
This document describes the download procedure with SIBDL. The SIBDL Manual includes the following chapters:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- Chapter 1: Introduction - Chapter 2: Download with SIBDL configuration - Chapter 3: Configuration for SIBDL
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
11/15
5
GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
5.1
Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
A “product”is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant. A “product”evolves through successive “product-releases”which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain “product-release”availability date. So, a “product-release”defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole, identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific “product-release”has been designed, engineered and marketed for. In some cases a “product-release”has further development steps, named “versions ”, that are born to improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing purposes. A “product-release”has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more handbooks. A new “version”of a “product-release”may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer Documentation set, as described in para.5.4. 5.2
Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to. The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level. 5.3
Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plantindependent. Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plantdependent documentation is not described here). Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel- Telecom Laboratory design choices. In particular the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the man- machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it. Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged. 5.4
Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the “product-release”are listed in para.2. Each handbook is identified by:
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
12/15
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- The name of the “product-release”(and “version”when the handbook is applicable to the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones), - The handbook name, - The handbook P/N, - The handbook edition (usually first edition=01), - The handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production. 5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons: - Only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook. - The edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In this case: • • •
The table in para.1.4 on page 5 indicates the section(s) edition change; In each section, the main changes with respect to the previous edition are listed; In affected chapters of each section, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software “version”distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures. Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s “version”marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent versio n, if the screen contents are unchanged. 5.4.2 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to commercial criteria. By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue (supplying errata-corrige sheets is not envisaged). 5.4.3 Changes due to a new product-release A new product-release change the handbook P/N and the edition start from 01. In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed. 5.5 Edition
Customer documentation supply on CD-ROM 01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
13/15
In the following “CD-ROM”means Customer Documentation on “CD-ROM” 5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD-ROM In most cases, a “CD-ROM”contains the documentation of one product-release(-version) and for a certain language. In some other cases, the same “CD-ROM”can contain the documentation of different Product-release (-version) s for a certain language.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
As a general rule: - CD-ROMs for Network Management products do not contain: • •
The Installation Guides The documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main applicative SW.
- CD-ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment). A CD-ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by Interleaf-World-View-Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks that make the navigation through the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook; so that the documentation present in the CD-ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper. The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf-WorldView) is added and a master CD-ROM is recorded. Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus- free product. After a complete functional check, the CD-ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the Production Department, so that the CD-ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers. 5.5.2 Use of the CD-ROM The CD-ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments. The minimum configuration for World View (Rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is: -
Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 Processor: Pentium RAM: 32 Mbyte Disk space: 20Mbyte
The set-up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD-ROM box. After the set-up procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included in the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
14/15
N.B. Copyright notification
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
WorldView:
Copyright 1981-1996 INTERLEAF Inc. All rights reserved. The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel. Alcatel documents: All rights reserved. Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD-ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. 5.5.3 CD-ROM identification Each CD-ROM is identified: 1) By the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD-ROM upper surface: - The name of the “product-release(s)”(and “version”when the CD-ROM is applicable to the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones), - A writing indicating the language(s), - The CD-ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N), - The CD-ROM edition (usually first edition=01) 2)
And, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose collection and processing the CD-ROM itself has been created.
5.5.4 CD-ROM updating The list of source handbook/document P/Ns-editions indicated in previous para.5.5.3 point 2), in association with the CD-ROM’s own P/N-edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel-Information-System as a structured list. Whenever a new editio n of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system, the Alcatel-Information-System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation department, indicating the list of CD-ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these handbooks/documents. This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD-ROM. Updating of CD-ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks composing the collection.
END OF DOCUMENT
Edition
01
SC.1: HandBook Guide 3AL 98104 ADAA
15/15
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Introduction
01
2004-04-21
Creation
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
Distribution: Internal
ED
01
External
Ma Jing APPROVED BY
PREPARED BY
√
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
1/15
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ..................................................................3 1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4 1.1 SCOPE....................................................................................................................................4 1.1.1 Document scope ...............................................................................................................4 1.1.2 Target audience................................................................................................................4 1.2 READING RULES ....................................................................................................................4 1.2.1 Menu options ....................................................................................................................4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL ...............................................5
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2
2.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................5 2.2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND LICENCE DELI VERED TO THE CUSTOMER .......................5 2.2.1 Software product and licences description ......................................................................5 2.2.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers ....................................................6 2.3 CRAFT TERMINAL MAIN FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE NE MANAGEMENT ..................................7 2.3.1 Network Element management supervision .....................................................................7 2.3.2 Network Element general configuration ..........................................................................7 2.3.3 Security Management .......................................................................................................7 2.3.4 External input and output point management..................................................................7 2.3.5 Diagnosis management ....................................................................................................7 2.3.6 Communication and routing management .......................................................................7 2.3.7 Equipment and board management..................................................................................8 2.3.8 Port management .............................................................................................................8 2.3.9 Protection management....................................................................................................8 2.3.10 Transmission management ...........................................................................................8 2.3.11 Cross Connection management....................................................................................9 2.3.12 Performance monitoring management.........................................................................9 2.3.13 Synchronization management ......................................................................................9 2.3.14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration.........................................................................................9 2.3.15 Software management ..................................................................................................9 3
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ................................................................................10
4
GLOSSARY OF TERMS........................................................................................................12
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
2/15
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES TABLES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Table 1. Software products part numbers.............................................................................................6 Table 2. Software licence part numbers...............................................................................................6
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
3/15
1
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
Document scope
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Introduction Manual presents the Craft Terminal main functions and provides a general overview of the different functionalities provided by the ELM–USM of the Craft Terminal for Info Model NE. 1.1.2 Target audience The Introduction Manual is intended for all users. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: –1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook 1.2
Reading rules
1.2.1 Menu options All the manuals describe menus, but not necessarily all the options of these menus. When a menu option is not detailed in a manual, the information are surely given in another manual.
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
4/15
2 2.1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements, providing ITU–compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element. Multiple NE management up to 32 Network elements is possible obtaining a remote Craft Terminal application. The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook, which the operator has to read before this Handbook. In the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook are described all the general description of use, navigation, rules, etc, common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal. Further, the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as “Installation”and common screens as “Network Element Synthesis view”. The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the application. Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EML–USM views. This Operator’s Handbook deals with the EML–USM views of the Craft Terminal, which directly permit to manage the Network Element. The management main functions of the EML–USM are inserted at para. 2.3. A detailed description of the EML–USM screens is given in Section Ne Management of this handbook. From the Craft Terminal is possible to run another Specific Software application. This application is in charge of the ATM and IP management inside the NE such as ATM/IP cross–connection, Backup and Restore configuration files etc. Details information about Specific Application are described in the relevant Operator’s Handbook (see Section 1 HANDBOOK GUIDE for the code). The list and part numbers of the SDH software products distributed by Alcatel is inserted in para.2.2 . The Craft Terminal characteristic (computer configuration) are listed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook. 2.2
Alcatel software product and licence delivered to the customer
2.2.1 Software product and licences description The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CD–ROM. In this CD–ROM are contained: Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
5/15
download function) The software package used for management permits the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to realize all the functions of the NES and EML–USM). The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on the NE, thus following product evolution.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel typically offers several software licenses on the software product (only one for this equipment) They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software features. 2.2.2 Software products and licences list and part numbers Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table. Table 1. Software products part numbers Name SWP 1662SM–C R 2.1 CD–ROM
ANV Part Number 3AL 98104 ADAA
FACTORY Part Number 415.100.666 N
N.B.
Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table. Table 2. Software licence part numbers Name SWL–A 1662SM–C Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWL–B 1662SM–C Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWL–C 1662SM–C Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWL–LCT 1662SM–C Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE SWL–RCT 1662SM–C Rel. 2.1 LICENCE FEE
ANV Part Number 3AL 80617 AA
FACTORY Part Number 700.200.301 X
N.B. 1
3AL 80618 AA
700.200.302 Y
1
3AL 80619 AA
700.200.303 Z
1
3AL 80620 AA
700.200.304 S
2
3AL 80621 AA
700.200.305 T
2
N.B. 1 License alternative for Network Element software features: SWL–A: Full functionality set SWL–B: Improved functionality set SWL–C: Basic functionality set N.B. 2 License alternative for Craft Terminal software features: SWL–LCT: Local Craft Terminal functionality SWL–RCT: Remote Craft Terminal functionality
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
6/15
2.3
Craft Terminal main functionalities in the NE management
In this chapter, are described the main functionalities of the Craft Terminal, referred to the Network Element management views, obtained by means EML–USM. The functionalities constitute the heading of each of the paragraphs below.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.3.1 Network Element management supervision Deals with the NE state and access. 2.3.2 Network Element general configuration Deals with the general configuration of the equipment. –Craft Terminal access state (allow or inhibit) –NE Time management –Alarms Configuration Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management, Allow/Inhibit alarm notification, Alarm re–synchronization. – Restart NE 2.3.3 Security Management Deals with the security configuration of the equipment. –Set Manager list –Set ACD level 2.3.4 External input and output point management Deals with housekeeping signals input from the external (station alarms) or forwarded (output) towards the external. –Display External points –Configure External points 2.3.5 Diagnosis management For real time alarm reporting and subsequent fault localization and correction. –Alarm Surveillance The alarms concerning a particular managed entity will be represented in a synthetic way in all the views concerning the entity. Alarms information are detailed in the Alarms Surveillance Manual –Abnormal Condition list ( as result of operator’s commands) –Event log Manager Permits to have access to the Event Log file. –Remote Inventory (”upload”and “view”remote inventory) –Internal Link Monitor 2.3.6 Communication and routing management This deals with the configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE. Different types of protection can be managed: –Local NE and OS addresses –NTP configurations –LAPD, Ethernet, MESA, RAP configurations ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
7/15
–IP Configuration –Tunneling Configuration
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.3.7 Equipment and board management Deals with the presentation of the equipment and the hierarchical tree structure, permitting to define the types of boards present. The Board view permits to access the Port view. –Set / modify / remove boards or subrack –Software information of the selected board. –Remote Inventory 2.3.8 Port management This permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred only to the port (SDH, PDH, HOA ATM and IP). It is used to check the detailed alarm of each TP and to configure them (many options are the same of the Transmission view). For each port a specific menu is available where various configuration of the specific port can be set, for example: –Automatic Laser Shutdown –MSP protection –Loopback management and configuration –Single fiber configuration –TP Frame Mode Configuration –Retiming –Ethernet Port Configuration Port view is also the entry point of other “management functions”: –Performance Monitoring management –Cross Connection management For each port are presented: –The various ITU–T functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4). –Details of alarm and state condition –TP role, connection, etc. information 2.3.9 Protection management This deals with the protection mechanism that is possible to configure in the NE. Different types of protection can be managed: –Equipment protection switching –Multiple Section Protection 2.3.10 Transmission management This permits to cover the manageme nt of the transmission resources, opening the views of all the specific ports of the NE (SDH and PDH). It supplies an overview of the complete signal flow. For all the ports are presented: –The various ITU–T functional blocks (i.e. PPI, RST, VC4). –Synthesis of alarm and state condition –TP role, connection, etc. information For each port a specific menu is available similar to the Port view where various configuration of ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
8/15
the specific port can be set. Also Transmission view is than the entry point of other “management functions”.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.3.11 Cross Connection management This deals with the connection of all the Termination Point (TP), which are the starting and terminating points of a transmission segment. In this way the multiplex structures are created, managing the traffic flow. Similar operation are made on the Overhead cross connections. –Create / modify cross connections –Activate / deactivate / switch cross connections 2.3.12 Performance monitoring management This function deals with the set up, collect, log and display performance data associated with the managed NE according ITU–T G.826.It consists of a set of functions that evaluate and report on the behavior of the NEs and their effectiveness relating to the communications taking place on the Network. –Set up the Performance Monitoring thresholds –Collect and display Performance Monitoring data –Performance monitoring history 2.3.13 Synchronization management Deals with the management of the timing. –Timing source, SSU, T0, T4, T5 and T6 configuration –Protection commands 2.3.14 ATM/IP/ETH Configuration Describes the operations necessary for the ATM/IP/ETH boards and the ATM/IP/ETH TPs creation. 2.3.15 Software management Deals with the manipulation of the software package within NE. –Software download refers to the NE software, permitting to charge the software in the relevant NE to upgrade the NE software, thus following product evolution, or as a consequence of substitution with a spare. –Back–up and restore on the MIB of the NE.
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
9/15
3
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal APS: Automatic Protection Switching ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Module CD–ROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee CT: Craft Terminal DCN: Data Communications Network ECC: Embedded Communication Channels EML: Element Management Layer EPS: Equipment Protection Switching FAD: Functional Access Domain Gbit/s: Gigabits per second GNE: Gateway Network Element HMI: Human Machine Interface IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IM: Information Manager Kbit/s: Kilobits per second LAN: Local Area Network LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container MAC: Media Access Control Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds MIB: Management Information Base MS: Multiplex Section ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
10/15
MSP: Multiplex Section Protection NAD: Network Access Domain NAP: Network Access Point NE: Network Element
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
NML: Network Management Layer NTP: Network Time Protocol OS: Operation System PI: Physical Interface SD: Signal Degrade SF: Signal Failure TMN: Telecommunications Management Network TN: Telecommunications Network TP: Termination Point USM: User Service Manager XC: Cross–Connection
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
11/15
4
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Acknowledgment: When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point out that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to set a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear has to be acknowledged. Administrator: A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities. Alarm: An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state of an equipment or the CT. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end. Alarm Severity Assignment Profile: Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes. Alarm Status: Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm. Board: A board is part of an NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE. Compact Disk Read Only Memory: Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to its available memory space. Craft Terminal: Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. It can be used to configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE. Cross–connection Cross–Connections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities, this is the possibility of routing one signal to a particular destination. Digital Communication network: Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format. Embedded Communication Channel: Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant SDH networks. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols. Element Management Layer: This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements. Equipment Protection Switching: Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
12/15
failure. Filter: They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. They can be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied to them.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Flushing: This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted. Functional Access Domain: It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user. Gigabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 9 bits every second. Gateway Network Element: It is a Network Element devoted to the control, from the OS, of those NEs providing a QECC* interface. To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* .QECC*. Human Machine Interface: It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system. History Report: This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entities composing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which he requires the report. International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee: Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITU–T (International Telecommunication Union). Kilobits per second: Unit that correspond to the transmission of 10 3 bits every second. Line Terminal: A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. it is used to transmit or receive signals. They can undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or multiplexing/demultiplexing functions. Logs: Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands and system alarms. The size of the log can be configured. Management Domain: The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Each management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs. Media Access Control Address: Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks. ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
13/15
Megabits per second: Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 10 6 bits every second. Multiplexer: Equipment used to combine several signals to produce a single signal at a higher transmission rate and to decompose it back to the smaller rate signals.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Multiplex Section: In general, represents the section containing the multiplexed signals. Network Access Domain: Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user can manage. Network Element: Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations. Network Management Level: Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network. Notification: Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE. Operation System: A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. it offers to the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System. Operator: The end–user of the Craft Terminal. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile. Physical Interface: Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouples the line signals and adapt the form of signal for further transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring and loopback functions. Port: A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is either a termination point or an origination point. Repeater: Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance. Severity: Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure. Telecommunication Management Network: ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
14/15
Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structure to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the information. Telecommunication Network: Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switching supports to the interconnected Network Elements.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Terminal Point: Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port. Thresholding: This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that, when exceeded, generate trouble indications. User Profile: Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefined user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, the administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles installed with Craft Terminal. User Service Manager: These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface and facilitate the interaction with the product. Wrapping: Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file is full.
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
01
SC.2:I ntroduction 3AL 98104 ADAA
15/15
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 NE Management
01
2004-04-21
Creation
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
Distribution: Internal
ED
01
External
Ma Jing APPROVED BY
PREPARED BY
√
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
1/388
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES ..................................................................8 1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................15
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................15 1.1.1 Document scope.............................................................................................................15 1.1.2 Target audience .............................................................................................................15 1.2 TERMINOLOGY....................................................................................................................15 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations .........................................................................................15 1.2.2 Glossary of terms...........................................................................................................15 2
GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS ................................................16 2.1 EML--USM VIEW ORGANIZATION .....................................................................................16 2.2 INTRODUCTION ON THE EML--USM MENU OPTIONS ..........................................................17 2.2.1 Views menu introduction ...............................................................................................19 2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction ..................................................................................20 2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction.........................................................................................21 2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction ......................................................................................22 2.2.5 MS-SPRing menu introduction ......................................................................................22 2.2.6 Download menu introduction ........................................................................................22 2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction........................................................................................22 2.2.8 Board menu introduction ...............................................................................................23 2.2.9 Port menu introduction..................................................................................................24 2.2.10 EPS menu introduction..............................................................................................26 2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction ...............................................................................26 2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction ...........................................................................28 2.2.13 External Points menu introduction............................................................................28 2.3 ADVICES ON NAVIGATION PRINCIPLES ................................................................................32
3
NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION ..................................................................................35 3.1 3.2
4
NE MANAGEMENT STATES ..................................................................................................35 NE SUPERVISION AND LOGIN ..............................................................................................35
NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION ......................................................37 4.1 ACCESS STATE (ALLOW OR INHIBIT NE CRAFT ACCESS) .....................................................37 4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state............................................37 4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state................38 4.2 NE TIME MANAGEMENT .....................................................................................................38 4.3 ALARM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................40 4.3.1 Procedure to modify an ASAP.......................................................................................40 4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP).............................................41 4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities .........................................................................................46 4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications ................................................................................47 4.3.5 Alarms re—synchronization ..........................................................................................48 4.4 RESTART NE.......................................................................................................................48
5
SECURITY MANAGEMENT ...............................................................................................50 5.1 5.2
6
SET MANAGER LIST ............................................................................................................50 SET ACD LEVEL .................................................................................................................50
EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEM ENT .....................................52 ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
2/388
6.1 DISPLAYING EXTERNAL POINTS ..........................................................................................52 6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list ...................................................................54 6.2 EXTERNAL POINTS CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................54
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
7
DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT..............................................................................................58 7.1 ALARMS SURVEILLANCE .....................................................................................................58 7.2 ABNORMAL CONDITION LIST ..............................................................................................60 7.3 INTERNAL LINK MONITOR ..................................................................................................61 7.4 LOG BROWSING ..................................................................................................................63 7.5 REMOTE INVENTORY ..........................................................................................................64 7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory...............................................................................................64 7.5.2 View Remote Inventory..................................................................................................65
8
COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT .................................................67 8.1 OVERVIEW ON COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING DOMAIN ..................................................67 8.1.1 OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc ...........................................................................................67 8.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains.................................................................68 8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP .................................................................................69 8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 .......................................................................................69 8.2 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING VIEWS..............................................................................70 8.3 LOCAL CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................................72 8.4 OS CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................................74 8.5 NTP SERVER CONFIGURATION ...........................................................................................75 8.6 LAPD CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................................76 8.7 ETHERNET CONFIGURATION ...............................................................................................79 8.8 REACHABLE ADDRESS PREFIXES CONFIGURATION .............................................................81 8.9 MANUAL ES ADJACENCIES TABLE CONFIGURATION ..........................................................82 8.10 IP CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................83 8.10.1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management .......................................84 8.11 IP STATIC ROUTING CONFIGURATION ................................................................................84 8.12 OSPF AREA TABLE CONFIGURATION .................................................................................85 8.13 IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION OF POINT- TO-POINT INTERFACES ........................................86 8.14 ISA BOARD IP ADDRESS ....................................................................................................87 8.15 OSI OVER IP .......................................................................................................................88 8.16 IP OVER OSI .......................................................................................................................89
9
EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................91 9.1 INTRODUCTION AND NAVI GATION .......................................................................................91 9.2 SET AND CHANGE OR REMOVE BOARD/SUBRACK ................................................................96 9.3 CONNECT FAN TO CONGI BOARD ......................................................................................98 9.4 BOARD ADMINISTRATIVE STATE .......................................................................................100 9.4.1 Setting a board in service ............................................................................................100 9.4.2 Setting a board out of service ......................................................................................100 9.4.3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state..................................................................101 9.5 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................102 9.6 REMOTE INVENTORY ........................................................................................................102 9.7 SHOW SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................104
10
BOARD VIEW.......................................................................................................................106 10.1
ED
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................106 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
3/388
10.2 BOARD VIEW MENU .........................................................................................................109 10.2.1 Port Access ..............................................................................................................109 10.2.2 Change Physical Interface.......................................................................................110 10.2.3 Show supporting equipment.....................................................................................111 11
PORT VIEW ..........................................................................................................................113
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
11.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................113 11.2 PORT VIEW : ELEMENTS ON THE TP...................................................................................115 11.3 PORT VIEW MENU ............................................................................................................116 11.4 SET RETIMING ..................................................................................................................117 11.5 AU4 CONCATENATION .....................................................................................................118 11.6 PHYSICAL M EDIA OPTION MENU .......................................................................................121 11.6.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration ..............................................................122 11.6.2 Show Optical Configuration ....................................................................................125 11.6.3 Single Fibber Configuration....................................................................................126 11.6.4 Ms Configuration.....................................................................................................128 11.6.5 Line Length Configuration ......................................................................................128 11.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration....................................................................................129 11.6.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol .....................................................................................132 11.6.8 Control Path Activation...........................................................................................133 11.6.9 LCAS Configuration ................................................................................................135 11.7 TP FRAME MODE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................137 11.8 SHOW SUPPORTING BOARD ..............................................................................................139 11.9 NAVIGATE TO TRANSMISSION VIEW .................................................................................140 11.10 NAVIGATE TO MONITORING VIEW ................................................................................142 12
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION MANAGEMENT (EPS)...................................................144 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5
13
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................144 MANAGEMENT : CONSULTING AND MODIFYING EPS .........................................................145 CONFIGURATION : REVERTIVE AND WTR FOR EPS ...........................................................149 SWITCHING EPS ...............................................................................................................150 EPS OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................151
MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION MANAGEMENT...........................................158 13.1 ARCHITECTURE TYPES ......................................................................................................158 13.2 MSP OPTIONS INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................158 13.3 MSP CREATE ...................................................................................................................159 13.4 MSP MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................................162 13.4.1 MSP modification ....................................................................................................164 13.5 MSP DELETE ....................................................................................................................164 13.6 DISPLAY OF P ROTECTION STATE ......................................................................................165 13.7 MSP COMMANDS .............................................................................................................167 13.8 MSP OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................169
14
TRANSMISSION VIEW ......................................................................................................175 14.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................175 14.2 VIEW ELEMENTS ...............................................................................................................176 14.3 VIEW LAYOUT ..................................................................................................................176 14.3.1 View Description .....................................................................................................176 14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View ....................................................177
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
4/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14.3.3 Naming TPs .............................................................................................................177 14.3.4 Dynamic View Behaviour ........................................................................................178 14.4 TRANSMISSION VIEW ACCESS AND MENU ..........................................................................178 14.5 ADD TP ............................................................................................................................179 14.5.1 TP Search.................................................................................................................179 14.6 TP CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................186 14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration .................................................................................186 14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management .................................................................................189 14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration ..................................................................................190 14.7 TP FRAME MODE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................192 14.8 TP THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................193 14.9 TERMINATE/DISTERMINATE TP ........................................................................................194 14.9.1 Terminate TP ...........................................................................................................194 14.9.2 Disterminate TP.......................................................................................................195 14.10 MONITORING OPERATIONS ...........................................................................................195 14.10.1 Creation/Deletion ....................................................................................................196 14.10.2 Configuration...........................................................................................................197 14.11 STRUCTURE TPS ...........................................................................................................199 14.12 LOOPBACK ....................................................................................................................200 14.12.1 Loopback Configuration..........................................................................................200 14.12.2 Loopback Management............................................................................................203 14.13 PHYSICAL M EDIA ..........................................................................................................206 14.13.1 Set Domain...............................................................................................................207 14.14 NAVIGATION COMMANDS.............................................................................................208 14.14.1 Expand.....................................................................................................................208 14.14.2 Hide..........................................................................................................................209 14.14.3 Show Supported Board ............................................................................................209 14.14.4 Navigate to Port View..............................................................................................210 14.14.5 Navigate to HOA Port .............................................................................................211 15
CROSS-CONNECTION MANAGEMENT........................................................................213 15.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................213 15.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................213 15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH ..................................................................................213 15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP).....................................................................216 15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names ....................................................................................220 15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types ..........................................................................................221 15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection ..................................................................................222 15.2 OPERATIVE S EQUENCE TO EXECUTE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ..............................................224 15.3 CROSS-CONNECTIONS MANAGEMENT ...............................................................................226 15.3.1 Search Criteria ........................................................................................................228 15.3.2 Cross-Connection List .............................................................................................230 15.3.3 Actions available .....................................................................................................232 15.4 CREATE/MODIFY CROSS-CONNECTIONS ...........................................................................233 15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters.................................................................................234 15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection .....................................................................................239 15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection .....................................................................................245 15.5 ACTIVATE/D EACTIVATE/D ELETE CROSS-CONNECTIONS ..................................................247 15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection ...................................................................................247 15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection...............................................................................248
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
5/388
15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection ......................................................................................248 15.6 SPLIT AND JOIN CROSS-CONNECTIONS .............................................................................248 15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection .........................................................................................248 15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections ...................................................................................250 15.7 PROTECTION SWITCHING ..................................................................................................250 15.8 PRINT ................................................................................................................................252 15.9 SHOW CROSS-CONNECTED TPS ........................................................................................253
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
16
OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................255 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7
17
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................255 OH CONNECTION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................255 OVERHEAD VIEWS.............................................................................................................256 OH CROSS CONNECTION ..................................................................................................257 OH TP CREATION .............................................................................................................263 OH TP DELETING .............................................................................................................264 OH PHONE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................265
PERFORMANCE MONITORING .....................................................................................267 17.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................267 17.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................267 17.1.2 Supported Performance Counters ...........................................................................267 17.1.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting .....................................269 17.1.4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS................................................................269 17.1.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting..........................................................270 17.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE......................................................................270 17.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) ...........................270 17.1.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA ...................................................270 17.1.9 Performance Data Collection..................................................................................271 17.1.10 Data Collection........................................................................................................271 17.1.11 Performance Monitoring History ............................................................................272 17.1.12 Thresholds................................................................................................................272 17.2 CONFIGURATION ...............................................................................................................273 17.3 DISPLAY CURRENT DATA .................................................................................................278 17.4 DISPLAY HISTORY DATA ..................................................................................................280 17.5 PM THRESHOLD TABLE SELECTION .................................................................................282 17.6 PM THRESHOLD TABLE CREATION / MODIFICATION / DISPLAY.......................................285 17.6.1 Creation ...................................................................................................................285 17.6.2 Modification.............................................................................................................286 17.6.3 Display .....................................................................................................................287 17.7 PM OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................288
18
SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT..........................................................................293 18.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................293 18.2 SYNCHRONIZATION MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................295 18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View ......................................................................295 18.2.2 Synchronization View ..............................................................................................296 18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration ..................................................................................298 18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands ..................................................................301 18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria .........................302 18.2.6 SSU Configuration...................................................................................................303
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
6/388
18.2.7 18.2.8 18.2.9 18.2.10 18.2.11 18.2.12 19
Remove Timing Reference .......................................................................................304 Change T4 T5...................................................................................................305 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit............................................................................................307 Set and Remove T0 Equal T4...................................................................................309 Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration...........................................................310 Show Timing Source ................................................................................................311
MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT............................................................................................313
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19.1 MS-SPRING INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................313 19.2 MS-SPRING CONNECTION CONFIGURATION ADVICES .....................................................313 19.2.1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices .........................................313 19.3 OPERATIVE SEQUENCE TO CONFIGURE MS-SPRING........................................................313 19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING...........................................313 19.4 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................314 19.4.1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration..............................................................................315 19.4.2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications ............................................319 19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands ............................................................325 19.5 MS-SPRING PROTECTION STATUS AND COMMANDS FOR 2 FIBER TERRESTRIAL APPLICATION.................................................................................................................................325 19.5.1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands......................................................................326 19.5.2 External commands (2F) .........................................................................................327 19.5.3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands..............................................................334 19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization ..........................................................................338 20
ISA/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................360 20.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................360 20.2 ATM/PR_EA/ETHERNET BOARD TTP S CREATION ...........................................................360 20.2.1 ATM boards .............................................................................................................360 20.2.2 PR_EA boards .........................................................................................................363 20.2.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board .....................................................................366 20.2.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board ...................................................................................370 20.2.5 ES1-8FE boards.......................................................................................................371
21
SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................375 21.1 GENERALITIES AND DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................................................375 21.1.1 Naming Conventions................................................................................................375 21.2 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD OPERATIVE SEQUENCE.................................................................376 21.2.1 Software Download upgrade ...................................................................................376 21.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure ..........................................................377 21.3 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD MANAGER MENU ........................................................................382 21.4 INIT DOWNLOAD ...............................................................................................................384 21.5 SW PACKAGE ACTIVATION AND UNITS INFORMATION .....................................................385 21.6 MIB MANAGEMENT ...........................................................................................................387
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
7/388
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
FIGURES Figure 1. EML--USM main view organization. ................................................................................17 Figure 2. Menu options flow chart -- 1..............................................................................................30 Figure 3. Menu options flow chart –2 ..............................................................................................30 Figure 4. Menu options flow chart –3 ..............................................................................................31 Figure 5. Menu options flow chart –4 ..............................................................................................32 Figure 6. NE EML-USM Main view.................................................................................................36 Figure 7. NE management: setting the access state. ..........................................................................37 Figure 8. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. .....................................................................38 Figure 9. NE Time dialogue box .......................................................................................................39 Figure 10. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile .............................................................41 Figure 11. ASAPs Management dialogue box. .................................................................................42 Figure 12. ASAP Edition dialogue box. ............................................................................................43 Figure 13. Set ASAP dialogue box. ...................................................................................................45 Figure 14. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities...........................................................................................47 Figure 15. Inhibit alarm notification..................................................................................................47 Figure 16. Allow alarm notifications .................................................................................................48 Figure 17. Alarm re--synchronizatio n ...............................................................................................48 Figure 18. Restart NE confirmation...................................................................................................49 Figure 19. Set Manager list................................................................................................................50 Figure 20. Set ACD level...................................................................................................................51 Figure 21. Opening the external points view .....................................................................................52 Figure 22. External points view .........................................................................................................53 Figure 23. Expanding or reducing the external points list. ................................................................54 Figure 24. Configuring external points..............................................................................................54 Figure 25. External input point configuration dialogue box..............................................................55 Figure 26. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL) ......................................55 Figure 27. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) .....................................56 Figure 28. Alarm Surveillance...........................................................................................................58 Figure 29. Alarm Surveillance...........................................................................................................59 Figure 30. Abnormal condition menu option ....................................................................................60 Figure 31. Example of abnormal condition list .................................................................................60 Figure 32. Example of loopback dialog window management .........................................................61 Figure 33. Internal Link Monitor .......................................................................................................63 Figure 34. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view.................................................63 Figure 35. Remote Inventory confirmation request...........................................................................64 Figure 36. Remote Inventory completed ...........................................................................................65 Figure 37. View Remote Inventory...................................................................................................65 Figure 38. Routing sub domain organization example ......................................................................69 Figure 39. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 .........................................................................................70 Figure 40. Comm/Routing options ....................................................................................................72 Figure 41. Local Configuration .........................................................................................................74 Figure 42. OS Configuration .............................................................................................................75 Figure 43. NTP Server Configuration ...............................................................................................76 Figure 44. LAPD Configuration dialog.............................................................................................78 Figure 45. Creation LAPD Interface .................................................................................................78 ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
8/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 46. Confirmation to change LAPD Role ................................................................................79 Figure 47. Ethernet Configuration.....................................................................................................80 Figure 48. Ethernet Configuration -- L2 only parameter...................................................................81 Figure 49. RAP Configuration...........................................................................................................82 Figure 50. MESA Configuration .......................................................................................................83 Figure 51. IP Static Routing Configuration.......................................................................................85 Figure 52. OSPF Area Table Configuration......................................................................................86 Figure 53. IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces ....................................................87 Figure 54. ISA Board IP Address ......................................................................................................88 Figure 55. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration...............................................................................88 Figure 56. IP over OS ........................................................................................................................90 Figure 57. Equipment Overview -- Subracks level ...........................................................................92 Figure 58. Equipment Overview -- Rack level (without Fans subrack) ............................................93 Figure 59. Equipment Overview- Rack level (with Fans subrack) ...................................................94 Figure 60. Equipment Overview - NE level......................................................................................95 Figure 61. Equipment menu ..............................................................................................................96 Figure 62. The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) ...........................................97 Figure 63. Connect FAN to CONGI..................................................................................................99 Figure 64. Remove FAN connection from CONGI.........................................................................100 Figure 65. Consulting a board’s administrative state ......................................................................101 Figure 66. Software Description dialogue box. ...............................................................................102 Figure 67. Remote Inventory...........................................................................................................103 Figure 68. Select Printer ..................................................................................................................104 Figure 69. Select Output Format for file .........................................................................................104 Figure 70. Equipment Overview -- Subrack level...........................................................................105 Figure 71. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board ..........................................................107 Figure 72. Example of a Board View ..............................................................................................108 Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis ....................................................109 Figure 74. Board menu options .......................................................................................................109 Figure 75. After “Port Access”selection (example) .......................................................................110 Figure 76. Change Physical Interface ..............................................................................................111 Figure 77. Subrack level..................................................................................................................112 Figure 78. Example of a SDH Port View ........................................................................................114 Figure 79. Termination TP box. ......................................................................................................115 Figure 80. G.783 Adaptation TP box. ..............................................................................................116 Figure 81. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM port) ........................................117 Figure 82. Set Retiming enable (before)..........................................................................................118 Figure 83. Set Retiming enable (after) ............................................................................................118 Figure 84. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands ..................................................................119 Figure 85. Example of a concatenated AU4 transmission view......................................................120 Figure 86. Example of a concatenated AU4c ..................................................................................121 Figure 87. Physical media menu (SDH port example) ....................................................................122 Figure 88. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management ......................................................................123 Figure 89. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete).........................124 Figure 90. ALS and Laser current state (exa mple) ..........................................................................125 Figure 91. Visualizing a port optical parameters .............................................................................126 Figure 92. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber..................................................................127 Figure 93. Single Fiber Configuration View ...................................................................................128 Figure 94. Ms Configuration ...........................................................................................................128
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
9/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 95. PDH Line Length Configuration View ..........................................................................129 Figure 96. Ethernet Port Configuration options ..............................................................................129 Figure 97. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog ...............................................................................130 Figure 98. Information dialog..........................................................................................................130 Figure 99. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) ............................................................................132 Figure 100. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) ....................................................................133 Figure 101. Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board) .........................................134 Figure 102. LCAS Configuration....................................................................................................136 Figure 103. LCAS Monitoring ........................................................................................................137 Figure 104. TP Frame Mode Configuration ....................................................................................138 Figure 105. Board View Example. ..................................................................................................140 Figure 106. “Navigate to Transmission view”selection.................................................................141 Figure 107. After “Navigate to Transmission view”selection........................................................142 Figure 108. View of Monitoring Operations (example) ..................................................................143 Figure 109. Consulting EPS ............................................................................................................145 Figure 110. EPS Management dialogue box ...................................................................................145 Figure 111. EPS: board selection.....................................................................................................148 Figure 112. EPS: choose protected ..................................................................................................148 Figure 113. EPS functional state from protected active board view ...............................................149 Figure 114. EPS functional state from protecting active board view ..............................................149 Figure 115 Configure EPS ...............................................................................................................149 Figure 116. EPS Management dialogue box ...................................................................................149 Figure 117. Switching EPS..............................................................................................................150 Figure 118. EPS Switch dialogue box.............................................................................................151 Figure 119. EPS overview ...............................................................................................................152 Figure 120. EPS overview after Search (Example) .........................................................................153 Figure 121. Subrack view after “Open Subrack View”command ..................................................156 Figure 122. Board view after “Open Board View”command .........................................................157 Figure 123. MSP Create Option ......................................................................................................159 Figure 124. MSP Schema Creation .................................................................................................159 Figure 125. MSP schema creation Port dialog ................................................................................160 Figure 126. TP Search .....................................................................................................................161 Figure 127. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example).........................................................162 Figure 128. MSP Management Option............................................................................................163 Figure 129. MSP Management View ..............................................................................................164 Figure 130. MSP Delete option.......................................................................................................165 Figure 131. MSP Schema Deletion .................................................................................................165 Figure 132. MSP Protection Status Examples .................................................................................167 Figure 133. MSP Commands option ...............................................................................................168 Figure 134. MSP Commands...........................................................................................................169 Figure 135. MSP overview ..............................................................................................................170 Figure 136. MSP overview after Search (Example) ........................................................................172 Figure 137. Port view after “Open Port View”commands .............................................................174 Figure 138. Symbols Used in Transmission View ..........................................................................176 Figure 139. Transmission View Area ..............................................................................................177 Figure 140. Transmission menu options ..........................................................................................179 Figure 141. TP Search Dialog, Initial State .....................................................................................180 Figure 142. Information Window ....................................................................................................180 Figure 143. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections .............................................................181
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
10/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 144. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed .................................................182 Figure 145. Symbols in TP Search..................................................................................................182 Figure 146. Board History Check List.............................................................................................183 Figure 147. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options .....................................................184 Figure 148. “Information...”Dialog for Search Process..................................................................184 Figure 149. Print to Printer ..............................................................................................................185 Figure 150. Print to File ...................................................................................................................185 Figure 151. Example Printout ..........................................................................................................186 Figure 152. High Order TP Configuration ......................................................................................187 Figure 153. J1 hexadecimal editor (example)..................................................................................188 Figure 154. J0 Configuration...........................................................................................................189 Figure 155. Low Order TP Configuration.......................................................................................190 Figure 156. J2 hexadecimal editor ...................................................................................................191 Figure 157. TP Frame Mode Configuration....................................................................................192 Figure 158. Degraded Signal Threshold selection...........................................................................194 Figure 159. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion ...................................................................196 Figure 160. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) ....................................................197 Figure 161. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example)............................................197 Figure 162. Monitor Configuration .................................................................................................198 Figure 163. Loopback configurations ..............................................................................................201 Figure 164. Port Loopbacks View ...................................................................................................203 Figure 165. Loopback Management ................................................................................................205 Figure 166. Loopback Port View.....................................................................................................206 Figure 167. Loopback Transmission View......................................................................................206 Figure 168. Set Domain ...................................................................................................................208 Figure 169. Board View ..................................................................................................................210 Figure 170. Port View......................................................................................................................211 Figure 171. Navigate to HOA Port ..................................................................................................212 Figure 172. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.709 ..................................................214 Figure 173. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy..................................215 Figure 174. SDH Transport Level Diagram ....................................................................................219 Figure 175. PDH Transport Level Diagram ....................................................................................220 Figure 176. Unidirectional Connection ...........................................................................................221 Figure 177. Bidirectional Connection..............................................................................................222 Figure 178. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs ....................................................222 Figure 179. Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected..................................................................223 Figure 180. Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected..................................................................223 Figure 181. Protected Broadcast ......................................................................................................224 Figure 182. Drop and Continue - Normal........................................................................................224 Figure 183. Cross connection management cascade menu .............................................................228 Figure 184. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) .................................................230 Figure 185. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) ...............................................232 Figure 186. Protection Criteria ........................................................................................................236 Figure 187. Cross-Connection Icons ...............................................................................................238 Figure 188. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection..................................239 Figure 189. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection.....................................................240 Figure 190. Search for Cross-Connection Output ...........................................................................242 Figure 191. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection...................................................243 Figure 192. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection..........................................................244
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
11/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 193. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection.............................................................246 Figure 194. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection.................................................................247 Figure 195. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection..............................................249 Figure 196. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection...............................................250 Figure 197. Protection Actions Dialog............................................................................................251 Figure 198. Select Printer ................................................................................................................252 Figure 199. Select Output Format ...................................................................................................253 Figure 200. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4 ......................................................................254 Figure 201. Overhead options ..........................................................................................................257 Figure 202. Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog..................................................258 Figure 203. Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog ..............................................................259 Figure 204. OH TP creation.............................................................................................................263 Figure 205. OH Search TP for creation...........................................................................................264 Figure 206. OH TP deleting.............................................................................................................265 Figure 207. Phone Parameters dialog window................................................................................265 Figure 208. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles ...............................................................269 Figure 209. PM Configuration Dialog (example)............................................................................275 Figure 210. PM question dialog box (example) ..............................................................................276 Figure 211. Current PM Data Dialog (example) .............................................................................280 Figure 212. PM History Data Dialog (example) .............................................................................282 Figure 213. PM Threshold Table Select ..........................................................................................284 Figure 214. PM Port View ...............................................................................................................285 Figure 215. PM Transmission View................................................................................................285 Figure 216. Create PM Threshold Table .........................................................................................286 Figure 217. Modify PM Threshold Table ........................................................................................288 Figure 218. PM Overview Menu item.............................................................................................289 Figure 219. PM Overview ...............................................................................................................290 Figure 220. Add TP for PM Overview ............................................................................................291 Figure 221. PM Overview after add TP ...........................................................................................292 Figure 222. Internal organization of the SETS. ...............................................................................293 Figure 223. Obtaining the synchronization view.............................................................................295 Figure 224. Synchronization View Example ...................................................................................296 Figure 225. Synchronization Menu .................................................................................................298 Figure 226. Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments .......................................299 Figure 227. Synch. Source configuration for ADM equipment ......................................................300 Figure 228. Lockout, Force and Manual commands .......................................................................301 Figure 229. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria .............................303 Figure 230. SSU Configuration.......................................................................................................304 Figure 231. Synchronization source removing ................................................................................304 Figure 232. Synchronization source removing confirmation..........................................................305 Figure 233. Change T4 T5 menu ..............................................................................................305 Figure 234. Change T4 T5 confirmation message....................................................................306 Figure 235. Change T4 T5: command execution......................................................................307 Figure 236. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu.....................................................................................308 Figure 237. Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message ............................................................308 Figure 238. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution ............................................................309 Figure 239. T4 equal T0 setting.......................................................................................................310 Figure 240. Transmission SSM Quality ..........................................................................................311 Figure 241. Timing Source Example ...............................................................................................312
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
12/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 242. Display MS–SPRing pull down menu .........................................................................314 Figure 243. MS-SPRing Management dialog box...........................................................................315 Figure 244. Creation Schema dialog box ........................................................................................316 Figure 245. Activated MS-SPRing Management ............................................................................317 Figure 246. Node Id and associated ring node position...................................................................317 Figure 247. Ring map configuration................................................................................................318 Figure 248. WTR dialog box...........................................................................................................319 Figure 249. Example of error message ............................................................................................319 Figure 250. Squelching table ...........................................................................................................320 Figure 251. Example of a ring traffic ..............................................................................................320 Figure 252. Connections of the ring ................................................................................................321 Figure 253. Squelching table of Node A, West side........................................................................321 Figure 254. Squelching table of Node A, East side .........................................................................322 Figure 255. Squelching table of Node B, West side ........................................................................322 Figure 256. Squelching table of Node B, East side .........................................................................323 Figure 257. Squelching table of Node C, West side ........................................................................323 Figure 258. Squelching table of Node C, East side .........................................................................324 Figure 259. Squelching table of Node D, West side........................................................................324 Figure 260. Squelching table of Node D, East side .........................................................................325 Figure 261. Confirmation message ..................................................................................................325 Figure 262. Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F)......................................................326 Figure 263. Ring Protection (2F) .....................................................................................................327 Figure 264. Lockout commands (2F) ..............................................................................................327 Figure 265. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) 328 Figure 266. Tail-end / Head-end association...................................................................................328 Figure 267. Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F) .................................................................................................................................................329 Figure 268. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F).................................................330 Figure 269. Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) .........................................................331 Figure 270. Forced and Manual Commands (2F)............................................................................331 Figure 271. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) ..............................................................332 Figure 272. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F) ............................................333 Figure 273. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) ....................................................................334 Figure 274. Example of confirmation dialog box............................................................................334 Figure 275. Clear WTR command (2F)...........................................................................................334 Figure 276. Ring network reference scheme (2F) ...........................................................................335 Figure 277. Examples of Double ring failure ..................................................................................336 Figure 278. Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization ........................337 Figure 279. Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F)............................................................338 Figure 280. Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network ...............................340 Figure 281. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F)....................................341 Figure 282. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F) .................................................342 Figure 283. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) ...................................................343 Figure 284. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN)...........................344 Figure 285. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN)............................345 Figure 286. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN)...........................346 Figure 287. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle" .................................................................................................................................................347 Figure 288. Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) ............................................349
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
13/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 289. Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN)............................................350 Figure 290. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN)....................................352 Figure 291. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN)...................................353 Figure 292. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN).........................354 Figure 293. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN).............................356 Figure 294. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN)...........357 Figure 295. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN)................358 Figure 296. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields) ..................................................................361 Figure 297. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) .....................................................................362 Figure 298. Navigate to ATM port view (example) ........................................................................363 Figure 299. PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields) .......................................................................364 Figure 300. PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) ..........................................................................365 Figure 301. MPLS port view example.............................................................................................366 Figure 302. ETH–MB (initial empty fieds) .....................................................................................367 Figure 303. ETH–MB (with defined TPs) .......................................................................................368 Figure 304. Control Path activation window (example)..................................................................369 Figure 305. ETHERNET port view example ..................................................................................370 Figure 306. ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields).....................................................................372 Figure 307. ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs) .......................................................................373 Figure 308. Navigate to ETH port view (example) .........................................................................374 Figure 309. Software Download general principle ..........................................................................375 Figure 310. Software Administration menu ....................................................................................378 Figure 311. Software Package Administration view .......................................................................378 Figure 312. SDH software package installation..............................................................................379 Figure 313. ATM software package installation (example) ............................................................380 Figure 314. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A)..................................................381 Figure 315. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) ..................................................382 Figure 316. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) ................................................................382 Figure 317. Equipment view............................................................................................................383 Figure 318. Download menu ...........................................................................................................384 Figure 319. SW Downloading dialogue box example .....................................................................384 Figure 320. Software download in progress (example) ...................................................................385 Figure 321. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) ..............................................386 Figure 322. Detail software package (exa mple) ..............................................................................387 Figure 323. NE MIB management ...................................................................................................388
TABLES Table 1. MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority .......................................................169 Table 2. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label...............................................................................188 Table 3. PDH TPs ............................................................................................................................220 Table 4. SDH TPs ............................................................................................................................221 Table 5. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation.........237 Table 6. Modifiable Parameters.......................................................................................................245 Table 7. Threshold table entities association...................................................................................284 Table 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values ........................................................................287
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
14/388
1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1
INTRODUCTION Scope
1.1.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand, configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily, using the Craft Terminal (CT). The different functionalities related to the equipment views. The menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. 1.1.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --- 1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --- Introduction manual 1.2
Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. 1.2.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
15/388
2
GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS
In this chapter the organization of the EML--USM screen, presented after the NE login, is described. First is introduced the view organization, than the accessible menu options are listed. At the end some further advice are given for Navigation principles.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.1
EML--USM view organization
The EML--USM view (see Figure 1) is the first window presented to the operator after the login. It contains the following fields, which provide you with information needed to manage the NE: l Severity alarm synthesis, l Domain alarm synthesis, l Management status control panel l View title, l View area l Message/state area The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permits to perform all the configuration and supervision and display the specific selected item. The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the description, except for the following information, that differs according the NE type: -- Domain alarm synthesis The different alarm domain type in which can be subdivided the NE is: Synchronization, External Point, Equipment, and Transmission. Information about the alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section of this handbook.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
16/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 1. EML--USM main view organization. 2.2
Introduction on the EML--USM menu options
The menu bar allows performing configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element. This paragraph lists all the menu options and then more details on the relevant contained entries. For each of them the relevant operative functions are briefly introduced. The flow charts of Figure 2., Figure 3., Figure 4., Figure 5., summarize the menu options.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
17/388
From chapter 3 on details and operative information on the all the views are given. They are not presented according the menu option sequence but according a functional subdivision. In the menu bar there are permanent menu items always displayed. Staring from the left , the menus are: •
Permanent Menus o Views (first column).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
To navigate among the views and set TMN and Overhead parameters. •
Configuration (second column). To set general configuration of the NE, set TMN and Overhead parameters and to show or modify some parameters (performance monitoring, ATM/IP/ETH creation, MSP, EPS and cross-connection).
•
Diagnosis (third column). To get information about the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory internal link monitor).
•
Supervision (fourth column). To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling).
•
MS_SPRing (fifth column)
To manage the 2- fiber MS_SPRing protection, setting the relevant configuration. •
Download (sixth column). To manage the NE software (download, MIB management).
•
Help (last column). To activate the help.
Further, in the menu bar there are other menus, presented as an alternative, only when a particular object or option is selected. •
Other Menus o Equipment (eighth column). To manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards, which compose it. From the Equipment view the Board view can be accessed. From the Equipment menu is also possible to start the Specific Terminal application for the ATM/IP traffic configuration.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
18/388
•
Board (eighth column). To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry point for the Port view.
•
Transmission (seventh column).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
It permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration. Further access the Performance Monitoring and permits navigation to the Board view. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration. •
Port (seventh column). To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port. It also permits to manage the MSP protection setting the relevant configuration.
•
EPS (seventh column). To manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration.
•
Synchronization (seventh column). To show and modify synchronization parameters.
•
External Points (seventh column). To show and modify housekeeping (environmental) alarms.
2.2.1 Views menu introduction This menu permits to navigate among the views and set some parameters, by means of the following entries: • •
Backward: Forward:
•
Equipment: Open the Equipment view. The "Equipment" menu and the "EPS" menu are then available on the menu bar.
ED
01
Go back to the previous view. Go to the next view.
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
19/388
•
External Points: Open the External Point view. The "External Point" menu is then available on the menu bar.
•
Transmission: Open the Transmission view. The "Transmission" menu is then available on the menu bar.
•
Synchronization: Open the Synchronization view. The "Synchronization" menu is then available on the menu bar Refresh: The aim of the refresh feature is to avoid a misalignment between the CT and the managed NE. This misalignment is due to a loss of notifications coming from the NE.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
•
Open Object : Navigate and show the contents of the selected object: the current view change. It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area.
•
Open in Window: Navigate and show the contents of the selected object. The current view doesn't change but a new window with a new view is opened.
•
Close: NE
Close the EML-USM view, without stopping the supervision of the
2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction This menu permits to set general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by means of the following entries: • • •
Alarm Severities: Manage the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. Set Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected object Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Send the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile referred to the equipment level.
• •
NE Time: Display and set the NE local time. Performance: Manage the Performance Monitoring domain. Used to define the PM parameters, opening the following menu options: - Threshold table
• • • •
EPS overview: Allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. Set ACD level: Cross Connection Management: Manage the connection of the paths. Loopback Management: Enter the loopback management. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes.
•
Comm/Routing: Enter the Communication and Routing management. Used to define the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN, opening the following menu options: • • • •
ED
01
Local configuration OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration Interfaces Configuration SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
20/388
•
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
-
IP Static Routing Configuration OSPC Area Configuration IP Address Configuration of point-to-point interfaces ISA board IP address
-
OSI Over IP IP over OSI
Overhead: Handle the operation on the Overhead bytes. Used to define the parameters in the following menu options: -
• • •
RAP Configuration MESA Configuration
Tunneling Configuration -
•
-
IP Configuration -
•
LAPD Configuration Ethernet Configuration
OSI Routing Configuration -
•
-
-
OH Cross Connection OH Phone Parameter OH TP creation OH TP deleting
MSP overview: Allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. PM overview: Allows displaying performance overview. ISA Port Configuration: It allows to create the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction This menu permits to get information about the NE, by means of the following entries: •
Alarms: Display the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE. It opens the following menu options: -
•
NE alarms Object alarms Subtree alarms Equipment alarms Transmission alarms External Points alarms
Log Browsing: Manage the events stored in the NE. It opens the following menu options: -
ED
-
01
-
Alarm Log Event Log SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
21/388
-
Software Trace Log
•
View Remote Inventory: Display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervisory" menu.
•
Abnormal Condition list Display the list of the object class (Loopback, ALS Handler, protection board) and the name of the boards that are in abnormal condition. Internal Link Monitor: Indicates the preference of failure on Rx or Tx side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active/standby MATRIX board. Dataflow Analyzer.
• • All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
-
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction This menu permits to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries: •
Access State: Manage the supervision access to the NE, with CT or OS. It opens the following menu options: -
•
OS Requested
Alarms: Manage the alarms supervision of the NE. It opens the following menu options: -
• • •
-
-
Resynchronize. Allow / Inhibits Notifs.
Upload Remote Inventory: Store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Set Manager list Restart NE: Reset the NE software.
2.2.5 MS-SPRing menu introduction This menu permits to age the 2- fiber and 4- fiber MS-SPRing protection (the last is not operative in current release), setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries: Main dialog for MS-SPRing management: Contains all the command to set and manage the MSSPRing 2.2.6 Download menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries: • • •
Init download: Manage the software download, upgrading the NE. Units info: Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks. Mib management: Permits backup of NE software configuration and restore of backup file.
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction This menu permits to manage the NE as a whole, setting the boards, which compose it, by means of the following entries: •
ED
Set: Add or change the board type (a list is proposed).
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
22/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Modify: Change the board type without previously remove it. It is only possible between compatible board or modules (ex. it is possible to change from an Long and Short 1.1 optical module)
• • • • • •
Remove: Remove the board. Set in service: Insert a lock symbol in the board. Set out of service Delete the lock symbol in the board, enabling changes. Reset: Not operative. Software description: Show information on the software of the board. Remote Inventory: Show the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment. It opens the following menu options: -
•
-
Subrack level Board level
ISA Board IP Address: Used to define the ISA board IP address N.B. This option is available only at Subrack view level.
•
Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper equipment level.
•
Connect FAN to CONGI #10: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot 10. N.B. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view.
•
Connect FAN to CONGI # 12: Enable the management of the Fan subrack alarms on CONGI inserted in slot12. N.B. This option is available only after having selected a CONGI board at Subrack level view.
2.2.8 Board menu introduction This menu permits to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol) and to access the port view, by means of the following entries: • • •
ED
Port Access: Access the "Port view". Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi- mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switch able). Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
23/388
•
ISA Port Configuration: It allows creating the TPs for the ATM/IP/ETH connections.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
N.B. This menu is available only if an ATM/IP/ETH board has been equipped in the subrack. 2.2.9 Port menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port, by means of the entries indicated in the following list. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM, IP and ETHERNET). The "Port view" is reached by means the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed alarms presented, but the available menu permits to configure the port (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. It permits navigation to the Transmission view. •
TP configuration: Set parameters for the Overhead (Signal Label and Path Trace) on Synchronous TP's.
• •
TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter. TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Set Retiming: Set the retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2Mbit/s. It opens the following options:
•
-
-
Enable Disable
•
AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views.
•
Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. It opens the following options: -
•
Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection
Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM, SUT . Not available for PDH port. It opens the following menu options: -
ED
-
01
-
Creation / Deletion Configuration
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
24/388
•
Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. It opens the following menu options: -
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management
-
MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete
Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the ports. Not applicable to HOA port. It opens a menu which differs according the port type: •
SDH port: -
•
•
-
ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration LAPD Configuration Ms Configuration
PDH port: -
-
Line Length Configuration HDSL Configuration NT G703/704 Configuration NT X21 Configuration
ETHERNET port: -
ED
-
MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Only for SDH ports view. It opens the following menu options: -
•
Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data
Loopback: Enter the loopback management. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: -
•
-
01
-
Remote Laser Management ALS Management Ethernet Port Configuration Ethernet Mapping protocol ISA Port Configuration Control Path Activation
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
25/388
• • •
Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening all TP's Navigate to monitoring view: permit to show for a selected TP the related POM/SUT/TCM and TCT object if present.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.2.10 EPS menu introduction This menu permits to manage the EPS protection, setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries: • • •
Management: Set EPS protections. Configure: Set revertive / not revertive and WTR parameters. Switch: Manage the EPS operator commands (Force, Manual, Lockout)
2.2.11 Transmission menu introduction This menu permits to show and set the Termination Point of the equipment, thus having an overview of the complete signal flow of the various port. The menu permits to define all the Cross Connections and manages the transmission resources, setting the relevant configuration. Further access the Performance Monitoring and manage Multiplex Section Protections and Loopbacks functions. It permits navigation to the Port view. The menu lists the following entries: • •
Add TP: Search and add TP to the transmission view, than presented in the screen. Expand: Display the TP's related to a selected TP. It opens the following menu options: -
•
-
Next level of lower TP All lower TP Next level of upper TP All upper TP
Hide: Remove the TP from the screen of the Transmission view. It opens the following menu options: -
-
Lower TP Upper TP Selected TP
• •
TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path trace. TP Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Only for PDH ports views.
• •
TP Threshold configuration: Set B2 Ex BER and Signal Degrade threshold. Terminate TP: Terminate the AU4-CTP paths.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
26/388
• • •
Disterminate TP: Disterminate the AU4-CTP paths. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. It opens the following menu options:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Configure Monitoring Display Current Data Display History Data
-
Port Loopback Configuration Loopback management
-
ALS Management Show Optical Configuration TX Quality Configuration Single Fiber Configuration Extra traffic Regeneration Section management Line Length Configuration Set Domain HDSL Configuration NT Configuration X21 Configuration
MSP: Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. It opens the following menu options: -
ED
-
Physical Media: Manage the TP physical setting. It opens the following menu options: -
•
Creation / deletion Configuration
Structure TP's: Define the structure of a selected TP (TU2, TU3, TU12, VC3/VC4, VC12) Loopback : Enter the loopback management. Used to configure the loopback command for commissioning or maintenance purposes: It opens the following menu options: -
•
-
Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. It opens the following menu options: -
• •
Cross Connection Management Create Cross Connection Modify Cross Connection Port Switch Over Show Cross Connected TP's
Monitoring Operation: Set parameters for POM, SUT. It opens the following menu options: -
•
-
01
-
MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
27/388
• •
-
MSP Delete NE MSP synthesis
Show supported board: Navigate to the board supporting the selected TP Navigate to Port view: Navigate to the port supporting the selected TP
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.2.12 Synchronization menu introduction This menu permits to set and show the Synchronization parameters and status, setting the relevant configuration, by means of the following entries: • •
Timing Source Configuration: Set timing source priority and quality for the selected input reference. Protection Command: Manage commands (force, manual, lockout) for the selected timing reference.
• •
T0 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM and WTR on the T0 synchronization source. T4 Configuration: Enable/disable SSM, WTR and Squelch Criteria on the T4 synchronization source.
• • • •
T0 TEST Configuration: Not used. SSU Configuration: Set NE single or with SSU. Remove Timing Reference Change T4T5: Change the synchronization physical interface from 2MHz (T4) to 2Mbit/s (T5) without traffic”and vice-versa. Change 2MHx->2Mbit : Change the source of a protection unit from 2Mhz to 2Mbit and vice versa. Set T0 Equal T4 Remove T0 Equal T4 Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration: Set SSM quality transmitted on the selected T1 SDH timing reference. Frame Mode Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/704 or ISDN-PRA management. Only for PDH ports views. Show Timing Source: Show the "port view" related to the selected timing reference.
• • • • • •
2.2.13 External Points menu introduction This menu permits to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm), by means of the following entries: • •
Configuration: Set the input/output environmental alarm. Display: Show the list of the input/output environmental alarm. It opens the following menu options: -
ED
01
-
Show external Input Points Show external Output Points Show all external Points
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
28/388
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
29/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 2. Menu options flow chart -- 1
Figure 3. Menu options flow chart –2
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
30/388
Figure 4. Menu options flow chart –3
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
31/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 5. Menu options flow chart –4 2.3
Advices on Navigation principles
Navigation rules are the same for all the NE using the same Craft Terminal Info Model. This general rules are described in the "Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook ". In this paragraphs are instead inserted menu options typical for this NE involved in Navigation and example of Navigation. To reach a particular view of the NE there are several ways (navigation is also possible mixing the different ways): •
Double click on the selected object
•
Select the object and use the Open object or Open in Window option of the View pull down menu
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
32/388
•
Use the Menu option tree structure. The View pull down menu permits to show the following menus: -
-
Equipment Transmission Synchronization External Points
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The menu structure permits to open the same window following several menu paths. EXAMPLE: to obtain the "Create Cross Connection" window: •
First navigation path: Open View - Transmission pull down menu
Open Transmission - Cross Connection - Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window •
Second navigation path: Open View - Equipment pull down menu Double click on Board Select the Board to access the Board view Open Board - Port Access pull down menu Open Port - Cross Connection - Create Cross Connection pull down menu
•
Third navigation path: Open Configuration - Cross Connection Management pull down menu Select Create option in the presented window
The menu structure also permits to pass from a view menu to another (i.e. from "port view" to “board view" or to "transmission view") thus facilitating the operators activity. Views Navigation The first level of the "Equipment view" representation will be displayed directly into the current window, immediately after the NE login. The Equipment view enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
33/388
Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The NE hierarchy is generally organized in the following way: Subrack > board > port > TP. Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • •
The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view By double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. Further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the key on the keyboard; It is also possible to: -
- Go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu - Go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu.
N.B. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level view (Example) is presented. In the Rack Level view two subrack are presented: - At the top the 1662SMC subrack, named SR62C (Example) - At the bottom the Fans Subrack, named SRFAN (Example) The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack. (Example) Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is presented.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
34/388
3
NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION
This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
3.1
NE management states
The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are the Network Elements (NEs). Operating with the Craft Terminal the NE can present different management states according to the condition of the connection (supervision, local access, connection state, etc). Also general Alarm status is presented. Management states are present at Network Element Synthesis view level and at USM--EML view level. All the information referred to the management states are inserted in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook. Any disruption in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in an update of the management states when the CT has detected the communication failure. 3.2
NE supervision and login
The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to get access to the current NE EML-USM view described in this handbook. The Network Element Synthesis views enable you to work on local or remote NE, selecting it and activating "Supervision" and "Login", as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator's Handbook. The EML-USM Main view is presented as for the following figure.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
35/388
Figure 6. NE EML-USM Main view
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
36/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
4
NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION
In this chapter general configuration referred to the equipment management are described (Craft Terminal access, NE Time, Alarms configuration, etc).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
4.1
Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)
The Craft Terminal can manage by the OS or the NE. To control the competition of the OS and the CT, a Local Access Cont rol (LAC) is available. If the LAC is "granted" that means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view the icon with a key symbol has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is "access denied" that means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify NE configuration (it can only "read"). In the view the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
If the LAC is "requested" that means the CT has requested permission from the OS and is waiting for a replay. However the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services includes: • • •
Reception and processing of alarms, Performance processing on TPs, Switching back to the OS access state.
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views: 4.1.1
Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7. NE management: setting the access state. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Craft access" operation using the Yes or No push buttons. The request is up to the OS, which accept or refuse it. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
37/388
If the OS doesn't answer in a predefined time it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be managed from a Craft Terminal.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
4.1.2
Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the OS... option from the Access State. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "OS access" operation. The OS now manages the NE. N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the OS manages by a craft terminal or the NE. N.B. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When communication is lost with the NE, the OS automatically recovers the communication and put the state that was set before the loss of communication (therefore the Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).
4.2
NE Time management
The NE local time of a selected NE can be visualized and/or re-aligned on the OS time basis. In this view the OS indication identifies the Craft Terminal. The status of the Network Time Protocol can be checked Select the NE Time... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
Figure 8. Consulting and/or setting the local NE time. The following dialogue box is opened from which you can get and/or set the local NE time and check the NTP Status.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
38/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 9. NE Time dialogue box The following fields are available: •
NTP Status section (read only) with the following parameters: §
NTP protocol It can be enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration) or disabled or empty (grey).
§
NTP Main and NTP Spare It displays the status of the Main and Spare NTP: reachable or unreachable.
•
Time section with the following data: §
NE Time and OS Time
It displays (read only) the time of the Network Element and of the OS (Craft Terminal). §
ED
01
Set NE Time With OS Time
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
39/388
It permits to align the NE time with the time of the Craft Terminal. Two different operative conditions can be defined: •
NTP protocol enabled
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In this case, NTP Main and NTP Spare will be reachable or unreachable. When both are reachable the NE uses the Main. The Set NE Time With OS Time message is not operative and the user cannot set manually the NE Time. •
NTP protocol disabled In this case, the NTP Main and NTP Spare are empty (grey); the Set NE Time With OS Time message is operative and the user can set manually the NE Time (i.e. change the NE time with the Time of the Craft Terminal).
If you do not want to set the NE local time, click on the Close push but ton to close the dialogue box. To re-align the NE time on the OS time basis click in the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either click on the Apply push button to validate or on the Close push button to cancel and close the dialogue box. The OS time comes from the PC date configuration that corresponds to the legal GMT time. N.B. When the NTP is not present, the OS system re-aligns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a configured periodicity. This periodicity is common for all the NEs. If you set the NE time, you will force the change, with an immediate effect on the NE. However it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism. 4.3
Alarm Configuration
The operations described in this chapter, mainly related to alarm setting, are: • • •
4.3.1 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j)
ED
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile management, Allow/Inhibit alarm notification, Alarm re-synchronization Procedure to modify an ASAP Select the TP (or board/port/etc…) whose ASAP is to be changed From the menu click on “Configuration”-> “alarms Severities….” Select one of the “user”profile (#10001 or #10002) and click on “Modify” Click on the “Probable Cause Families”associated to the alarm Select the relevant alarm in the list of “Probable Cause Name” In the “Service affecting/non-affecting”fields select the needed severity (critical/major/minor… ) Click on “OK” Click on “Close” Select the relevant TP and then “Configuration”-> “Set Alarms Severities… ” In the box that appears select the just modified ASAP (eventually check it by means of “Detail”)
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
40/388
k) Click on “OK” 4.3.2 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Management (ASAP) Managed entities yield alarms when they malfunction. This section deals with the configuration of ASAPs. An ASAP is a list of Alarm probable causes to which Severities Profiles are assigned, predefined or settable by the operator.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Three important notions are: • • •
The Probable Cause of the alarm, The Severity of the alarm. The Alarm Type (communication alarm, equipment alarm).
4.3.2.1 Alarm Severities This option permits to configure and display the ASAP. Select the Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu.
Figure 10. Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profile The ASAP Management dialogue box is displayed.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
41/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 11. ASAPs Management dialogue box. The default presented profiles is: • •
Profile “No alarms”. Whit this profiles all the alarms are enabled (only Software Download Failure is not alarmed). This ASAP enables the emission of all alarms. Profile “No Remote Alarms”shows the alarm criterion configuration defined for "path alarms" (only AIS and RDI and Software Download Failure are not alarmed). This ASAP enables the emission of all: -
•
Profile “Primary alarms”with this profile the AIS, Battery Degraded, Software Download Failure, SSF and RDI alarms are not alarmed. This ASAP enables the emission of all: -
•
ED
- Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS & RDI alarms are not alarmed) - Equipment alarms - Environmental - Error Processing (i.e. Software Download Failure is not alarmed)
- Communication Alarms (i.e. the AIS, SSF & RDI alarms are not alarmed) - Equipment alarms - Environmental - Error Processing (i.e. Software Download Failure is not alarmed)
Profile “All Alarms” (i.e. all alarms disabled). This ASAP inhibits the emission of any potential alarm.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
42/388
•
The user can set profile 10001. Each single alarm can be classified with a criterion selected by the operator. A default standard configuration is set. (Battery Degraded, Battery Failure, Communication Subsystem Failure, Path Trace Mismatch are not alarmed). NOTE: if this profile is not already present in the list, it is necessary to create it, selecting one existing profile and then clicking on the Clone button.
You can select an ASAP.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
For ASAP "10001" it is then possible to choose Detail, Modify, Clone or Delete buttons. For ASAP “No Alarms”, “Primary alarms”. “No Remote Alarms”and “All Alarms”it is only possible to choose Detail, or Clone buttons. Clone selection can be used to create new ASAP. Click on Detail, Modify, or Clone button, the ASAP edition dialogue box is displayed.
Figure 12. ASAP Edition dialogue box.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
43/388
The alarm severity assignment profile dialogue box displays a list of probable causes and a list of alarm severity. The Probable cause family checks buttons allows filtering the probable causes that will appear in the Probable cause name list. NOTE: it is necessary to choose one or more of these filters to have the list. To find a particular probable cause, enter its name in the Search entry box at the bottom.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
ASAPs are already defined in the system with default values for the assigned severities. You can modify the severity associated with each probable cause. To do this, select the probable cause whose severity level you wish to modify. Then click on the option button: Service Affecting (not protected probable cause), and then Non Service Affecting (protected probable cause) and then Service Independent (don't used, it is not operative). For each the severity can be chosen from "Critical", "Major", "Minor", "Warning", "Non-alarmed" or "Not used". A "Non-alarm" probable cause corresponds to no alarm emitted for this probable cause. When selecting Details the assigned severity are only shown and it isn't possible to modify. When you have finished configuring ASAP, press the OK button to confirm the settings and close the dialogue box or the Cancel push button to cancel the new settings and close the dialogue box. When Clone an ASAP the created one is identified with next number (10002,). The max number of ASAP is six. N.B. The number of severities and the number of probable causes is fixed. The ASAP function only enables the modification of the severities assigned to the probable causes, it does not allow the addition, removal or modification of these severities and causes. N.B. To take into account a profile modification, it is mandatory to perform a re-synchronization of the alarms. During this re-synchronization, the severity of each alarm is updated. Otherwise, the severities are updated only when the NE emits the modified or new alarms. 4.3.2.2 Set Alarm Severities To assign an alarm severity to a TP or equipment, select the TP or equipment in the related view and then select the Set Alarm Severities... option from the Configuration pull down menu. The Set ASAP dialog opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
44/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 13. Set ASAP dialogue box. Within the "Apply to" section on the right side, the user specifies the objects (TP or equipment) the ASAP selected in the List of ASAPs (new ASAP) should be applied to: Choose Scope •
Selected object only The new ASAP is only applied to the object currently selected in the view This is the default if an object is selected in the view.
•
Network element The new ASAP is applied to all objects of the NE matching criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP". Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the section "Execution Monitoring". This is the default if no object is selected in the view.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
45/388
•
Selected object and subordinates The new ASAP is applied to the selected object and those of this subordinates matching the criteria specified in "Choose Classes" and "Choose current ASAP".
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Since this application process takes some time, its progress is shown in the Section "Execution Monitoring". N.B. Due to system architecture, AU-4CTPs are no subordinates of MSTTPs. Therefore, if the AU-4 CTP should be included as subordinate, select the related OSTTP (OpS) or ESTTP (EIS) as main object. Choose Class (es) Enabled if one the scopes "Network Element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is selected. • •
All classes (es) Specific class (es) Select one or more object classes the new ASAP shall be applied to.
Choose current ASAP The new ASAP is only applied to objects, which are currently assigned to the ASAP. Execution Monitoring Continuously shows the number of modified objects during the ASAP application process if one of the scopes "N etwork element" or "Selected object and subordinates" is chosen. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close to close the dialog and discard any changes. 4.3.3 Set SdhNE Alarms Severities Selecting the Set SdhNE Alarms Severities option from the Configuration pull down menu only the alarms at Equipment level (FF, BKF, SHD and ABF) are managed.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
46/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 14. Set SdhNE Alarms Severities If an object was selected in a view before opening this dialog, its ASAP is highlighted in the list. Using the Detail button or double-clicking on a list item opens the ASAP Edition dialog which displays detailed information on this ASAP. Press Ok to confirm the ASAP assignment and close the dialog. Press Close the dialog and discard any changes. 4.3.4 Allow/Inhibit Alarms Notifications The system provides the possibility to allow/inhibit the spontaneous incoming alarm notifications. a) To inhibit alarm notification, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Inhibit Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 15. Inhibit alarm notification From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. To inform the operator that alarms have been inhibited, the labels of the alarm panel are grey out.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
47/388
N.B. Inhibiting the alarms notification means that they are not forwarded to the CT but alarms are still generated by the NE.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
b) To allow alarm notification Select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Allow Notifs option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16. Allow alarm notifications From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. 4.3.5 Alarms re — synchronization The system provides the possibility to recover alarms present on the NE and to update the current problem list of the NE. After this operation CT and NE current alarms are consistent. To re--synchronize the alarms, select the Supervision pull down menu. You can then select the Resynchronize option from the Alarms pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17. Alarm re--synchronization From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the operation using the Ok or Cancel push buttons respectively. N.B. This functionality has to be used only if there is any perturbation. Never use this operation during a correct behavior. 4.4
Restart NE
The restart operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions. The restart operation in any case activates the Commit (active) version. Select the Restart NE option from the Supervision cascading menu. The following dialogue box is opened.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
48/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 18. Restart NE confirmation Click on the Cancel push button to abort the restart NE.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
49/388
5
SECURITY MANAGEMENT
In this chapter are inserted setting options referred to the Security management: Set Manager list
5.1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the NE. Select the Set Manager list option from the Supervision pull down menu. The dialog-box contains the following fields: •
Manager list: each connected manager to the NE is highlighted in the list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination. Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the NE. The Manager List contains the list of managers (i.e. RM, SY, NPOS, EML) that work on the NE. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection).
•
NE Domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to the NE.
The different domains could be assigned to different operators. OK button is used to validate the selection. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 19. Set Manager list 5.2
Set ACD level
This option allows the user to select the level of the Access Control Domain. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
50/388
The ACD manage the concurrence of access among several different managers (i.e. RM and EML). This only acts on the functions that can be used by different manager. Select the Set ACD level option from the Configuration pull down menu. The dialog-box contains the following fields:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Current ACD level Show the Access Control Domain level currently set.
•
The Access Control Domain check level Permit to set one of two level checks. By the way, this is an operation that should be performed only during the EML-USM installation phase:
• •
NE level, the ACD is performed on all the NEs No Check, the ACD is not managed
The default value is NE level. If it is changed, it is necessary to restart the EML-USM. OK button is used to validate the selection. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 20. Set ACD level
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
51/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
6
EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINTS MANAGEMENT
This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm), An external input point is an environmental alarm (also called housekeeping alarm). It corresponds to an external event, which is monitored by the NE. Number of relays on the NE is dedicated to check modification of the environment as for example a fire, a flood... An external output point is used to manage a NE contact (i.e. relay) connected to detector. An external output point is independent from external input point. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: -- Displaying external points, -- Expanding or reducing external points list, -- Configuring input and output external points.
6.1
Displaying external points
Select the External Points option from the Views pull down menu.
Figure 21. Opening the external points view After selecting this menu option the external points view is displayed into the current window instead of the current view.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
52/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 22. External points view The external points view displays a list of all input and output points. The following information is given for each external point: • •
ED
The external point type: Input or Output. The user label: a user-friendly label associated to the configurable external point (see further the paragraph External points configuration).
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
53/388
•
The external state: represents the alarm state. "On" when the alarm is raised, else "Off". If the external point is active (On), a little flag is represented near the status of the concerned point.
Only for the “Output”external point there is the following information:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
The Output criteria: if configured, display the alarm event and the board effected associated to the Output point (see further the paragraph External points configuration)
6.1.1 Expanding or reducing external points list The external points view displays a complete list of the external points but it can also be restricted to the input or to the output points. To see either the input points, the output points or all the external points, select the appropriate option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 23. Expanding or reducing the external points list. External points configuration
6.2
The configuration operations available on external points are: • • •
"User labels" configuration "External state". Can be set for output points (ON or OFF) "Output criteria" associated to the External output point
To configure an external point, click on the concerned row. And then select the Configuration option from the External Points pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 24. Configuring external points. The following dialogue box is then opened, displaying information about the selected external point (Input or Output).
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
54/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 25. External input point configuration dialogue box
Figure 26. External output point configuration dialogue box (MANUAL)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
55/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 27. External output point configuration dialogue box (FLEXIBLE) Opening the dialog the current state of the selected External Point is shown. 1) External Input Point Configuration l l l
User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the associated event that must be taken under check (for example presences of water of fire in the room where the Equipment is placed) External State: this field is set to off and can't be changed by the operator Probable Cause: the field is set to housekeeping and can't be changed by the operator
2) External Output Point Configuration l l l l l l
ED
User Label: this field can be filled by the user with a Label that indicate the alarm detected or the action that must be executed if a specific event occur (for example a "Pump" activation when water is present in the room where the equipment is placed. External State: can be set to "on" (alarm) or "off" (non alarm) only if "Manual" option has been selected in the "Output Criteria" field. Output Criteria can be configured as: Manual (forced). The output contact is set in a fixed way, not depending on a particular event. For example the output contact could be used to "Manually" activate a pump drain water from the room where the equipment is placed; in this case is also necessary to set the option "On" in the field "External State". Flexible. It is possible to define from CT the couple event/CPO#, where the event is chosen between a set of Output Criteria (LOS, RDI and LOF) and specifies the STM-N interface which the Output Criteria refers to by clicking on Choose button; subsequently the TP search dialog box will be opened.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
56/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
When the configuration of the external point is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
57/388
DIAGNOSIS MANAGEMENT
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
7
Alarms are always present on the operator's workspace. The different types of alarms, their number and their severity level, are represented in all Equipment views (NE views, Board views and Port views). An icon representation is used, which change color when the relevant alarm is active. Thus, at all times, you know the number of alarms and their severity relating to the equipment. Access to the Alarm Surveillance to show the alarm condition is detailed in the following paragraph. Than is presented the abnormal condition list (as result of operator's command such us loop, laser forced on etc.). At the end the Event log access is introduced. Information about the significance of equipment alarms and status is given in the Maintenance section. 7.1
Alarms surveillance
In this chapter is described the access to the Alarm Surveillance information of the NE. It is possible to show all the Alarms or filter the alarms report. Select the Diagnosis pull down menu. You can then select the following option from the Alarms pull down menu: •
NE Alarms: all the NE alarms are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report which is activated
•
Object Alarms: only the alarms of the selected object are listed in the Alarm Surveillance Report
•
Subtrees Alarm: only the alarms of the selected object and of the relevant subtrees are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
•
Equipment Alarms: only the alarms of the equipment management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
•
Transmission Alarms: only the alarms of the transmission management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
•
External Points Alarms: only the alarms of the input external point management are listed in the Alarm Surveillance report
Figure 28. Alarm Surveillance
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
58/388
Selecting any of the previously seen options, the Alarm surveillance report is displayed as for the example of the following figure.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This view shows first a synthesis of the NE alarms (Counter Summary) with the sum of all alarms, then a detailed list of alarms of the selected filter (Alarms Sublist).
Figure 29. Alarm Surveillance Detailed information for each alarm is supplied.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
59/388
For example the board in which the alarm is detected, the status of the alarm, the alarm type, the probable cause. The information supplied helps the operator, typically during troubleshooting operation, presented in next section. (Maintenance section, where more details about alarms is given). Detailed description is given in the AS Operator's Handbook.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
7.2
Abnormal Condition List
The abnormal condition provides the synthesis of NE "not normal conditions" listing the events that contribute to abnormal condition. Select Diagnosis->Abnormal Condition List.
Figure 30. Abnormal condition menu option
Figure 31. Example of abnormal condition list The abnormal conditions are the following: • • •
ED
Loopback ALS is disable and the laser is forced on or off Protection units (in case of EPS, SNCP and MSP if supported) are in lockout or in forced status 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
60/388
•
Board (or sub-board) is placed in a not configured slot
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select an abnormal condition and click on “OK”to open the relative dialog window. Figure below is opened.
Figure 32. Example of loopback dialog window management The other abnormal condition types will open the corresponding management window or will open the window to navigate towards the management window. 7.3
Internal Link Monitor
This function improves, at the user interface level, the diagnostic associated to the hardware failure. The presence of a failure on RX or TX side for the signal incoming/outgoing from/to the active MATRIX is detected; Internal Link Monitor displays a detailed localization of the link failure: a graphical representation of all NGI link status, for the active and stand-by MATRIX is shown.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
61/388
Select the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu. As shown in Figure below. The first page displays the link status for the main MATRIX, the second one concern the spare MATRIX. In detail, each page contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • •
•
The tab of the page displays the user label of the MATRIX board; The left side of the page displays the block representing the MATRIX board; The right side of the page displays the list of blocks representing the equipped boards; each block displays a string contained the user label of the associated board; Two arrows are displayed between the MATRIX block and each board block; the two arrows represent the link status in RX and TX side: -
A red arrow indicates a "link failure"
-
A green arrow indicates a "working link"
The Refresh button allows performing an explicit refresh of all the displayed information.
In order to indicate all the possible roots of the "link failure", all boards that detect the link failure are represented by a red block in the page of the MATRIX main: • •
ED
a”port" board in represented by a red block if a link problem is detected in the NGI Rx from the active MATRIX. A red block represents the MATRIX if a link problem is detected in one of the NGI Tx from one of the possible "port" board.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
62/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 33. Internal Link Monitor 7.4
Log Browsing
From the Network Element context views, perform the following operations to have access to the Event Log file: -
In the Diagnosis pull-down menu, select the Log Browsing option.
Figure 34. Log Browsing option in Network Element context view The Proposed option: •
ED
Select the Alarm Log option (Log Id # 1) to access the Event Log file.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
63/388
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to analyze all alarms stored in the NE. Refer to the "EML Operator's Handbook" •
Select the Event Log option (Log Id # 2) to access the Event Log file.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Configuration and Log Browsing ELM Windows open, permitting to analyze all events stored in the NE. Refer to the "ELM Operator's Handbook" •
7.5
Software Trace Log option is reserved to Alcatel personnel only. Remote Inventory
This paragraph describes the access to the remote inventory of this NE. In the Remote Inventory are stored information of identification, construction data etc. The options used are: • •
Upload Remote Inventory: store the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. View Remote Inventory: display the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the "upload remote inventory" performed in the "Supervision" menu.
Remote Inventory option of the Equipment. 7.5.1 Upload remote Inventory This command stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal. Select the Upload Remote Inventory option of the Supervision pull down menu. A confirmation dialog box is opened.
Figure 35. Remote Inventory confirmation request Clicking on OK after a while an information dialog box is presented.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
64/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 36. Remote Inventory completed 7.5.2 View Remote Inventory This command displays the remote inventory previously stored in the Craft Terminal by means the Upload remote inventory. Select the View Remote Inventory option of the Diagnosis pull down menu. The Remote inventory data appears.
Figure 37. View Remote Inventory Data is displayed in specific fields: •
Company
It indicates the Company's (Alcatel's branch) which designs the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). •
ED
Unit Type
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
65/388
It indicates the units' acronym •
Unit Part Number
It indicates Alcatel or Factory product's Part No. The number indicated is that printed on the labels or on the units' front cover plate. •
Software Part Number
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
It indicates the id. of the unit's resident software •
CLEI Code
It indicates the CLEI code according to Belle core specs. TR-ISD-325 •
Manufacturing plant
It indicates the Company's manufacturing plant id. Within the company, producing the unit. Refer to Alcatel for the abbreviation's meaning (four characters). •
Serial Number
It indicates the product's serial number as specified by the NR 130 Norm. •
Date identifier
It indicates the meaning of the date that follows. It is a two-digit code supplying the following information: 00 date of construction at the time of final testing 01 production order data 02 construction date of the unit lot 03 date products has been forwarded to customer 04 customer order date •
Date (YYMMDD)
The identification of the date depends on the indications stated in the previous field. When only the year is displayed, the format must be "YY- - - - "
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
66/388
8
COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT
8.1
Overview on Communication and Routing Domain
The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to define configuration parameters concerning the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide a global communication capabilities inside the network.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
8.1.1
OSI Protocol on QB3/Qecc
A brief description of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing domain follows. During the TMN design process, a network is partitioned into domains ; each domain can consist of a collection of two types of nodes: •
•
Nodes supporting a link state routing protocol IS-IS; these nodes will be called adaptive routers ; IS-IS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a complete consistent picture of the network topology. Use of IS-IS routing protocol in a TMN facilitates installation and operation due to the "self learning" capabilities of these protocols and automatic network reconfiguration in case of failure; moreover the use of these standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a MultiFinder environment. Nodes not supporting these protocols; these nodes will be called static routers ;
Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains ; networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains . Moreover, a node which have to take routing decisions must became Intermediate Systems , all others can be made End Systems For the description of the following paragraphs use is made of Figure below. It is not a networkplanning example; it is only used to describe L1, L2, RAP and MESA. 8.1.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Sub domains In order to reduce the overhead associated with distributed adaptive routing, it may be useful to divide a adaptive routing domain into smaller routing sub domains, called areas or level 1 sub domain. A level 1 sub domain should fulfill the following requirements: • • •
•
ED
A level 1 sub domain should form a connected sub network; this sub network should have only a few links to the outside world, compared with the number of internal links; Each node must belong to exactly one level 1 sub domain; Each node which is connected to a foreign level 1 sub domain must become a level 2 intermediate system; level 1 intermediate systems know how to communicate only with IS in the same area; obviously, there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level 1 sub domain; Level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network, because leve l 1 path cannot be utilized for level 2 communications. This network will be called level 2 backbones.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
67/388
In the simplest case, all nodes within a level 1 sub domain share the same area address. In general it is allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain even if the usage of this features should be checked with Alcatel engineers.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The synonymous list is used to ease partitioning in the future. There is a basic rule, which must be followed by two neighboring level 1 intermediate systems within a sub domain: there must be at least one area address in common between their two synonymous list, otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other. 8.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains In certain situations it may be necessary to partition a given network into separate routing domains, where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. The major benefits of this partitioning are reduction of memory, processing and traffic overhead, because there is no exc hange of routing information between the domains. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP). A Reachable Address Prefixes represents static routing information. It can only be associated with a link of a level 2 intermediate systems, whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. A Reachable Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as information about a foreign level 1 sub domain within the own domain. The Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link with witch the prefix is associated. For example, consider network, which is split into two separate routing domains: • •
Routing doma in A resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "a" Routing domain B resides in a level 1 sub domain with area address "b"
In order to enable the communication, the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain the area address "b" and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain the area address "a". On the other hand, within a given level 1 sub domain, there can be some NEs not supporting IS-IS nor ES-IS protocol (static routing). In such condition, the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End System Adjacencies (MESA). A prerequisite for the use of manual end system adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected nodes must be the same; as a consequence the nodes must belong to the same level 1 sub domain. Within a pure Alcatel network there is no need to use any kind of static routing. Therefore normally RAP and MESA shall never be used.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
68/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 38. Routing sub domain organization example 8.1.3 IP over OSI tunneling for ATM/IP This feature is applicable to NEs equipped with ATM/IP boards. It permits to create a tunnel over OSI systems, to communicate IP management messages through an OSI network; it encapsulates the SNMP messages of the TCP/IP protocol stack over the OSI stack, using CLNP, LAPD, ECC protocols, and an OSI address. In this way the message reaches its final destination 8.1.4 OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 This feature allows the Element Manager to reach the GNEs (and all the relevant NEs behind them) by using IP networking. This would permit to use an external DCN based on IP only. Hence, no OSI networking would be required on the external DCN. OSI over IP technique is used to meet the target. OSI packets leaving the SH are encapsulated into IP packets within the SH system itself. Hence, packets leaving the SH are IP packets, containing the original OSI packet. Once the packet gets the NE through a pure IP network, the GNE has to strip off the IP
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
69/388
encapsulation, extracting the OSI packet, and to route the OSI packet as it does today using a pure OSI networking. Hence, the internal networking of the SDH network (DCCs) is still based on OSI. No IP packets shall flow inside DCCs, because the GNE receives the IP packet containing the OSI packet, deletes the IP header, and forwards only the OSI packet on DCCs.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The default OSI lower layers networking can be replaced by IP routing capability at the bottom of the QB3/QECC communication protocol suite; the choice is software switchable at NE level. The implementation adopts the RFC1006 standard to put the OSI upper layers on top of IP networking. The application goal is to offer the TCP/IP transport (i.e. Internet compatibility) in alternative to the full ISO/OSI communication protocols, in the complete DCN network or at least in a consistent portion of it. Figure below depicts the protocol architecture.
Figure 39. OSI over IP tunneling on QB3 8.2
Communication and routing views
To access select Comm/Routing option from the Configuration pull down menu as shown in the following figure. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
70/388
The Communication and Routing Views allows to perform the following operations: • • •
Local Configuration: definition of the local NE addresses OS Configuration: addressing of the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE NTP Server Configuration: addressing of the main and spare NTP servers connected to the local NE
•
Interface Configuration Subdivided in:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
§ § •
LAPD Configuration: definition of the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel on the local NE Ethernet Configuration: definition of configuration parameters needed to manage a local NE which provides a LAN Ethernet interface
OSI Routing Configuration Subdivided in: §
RAP Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of NE connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different from the one of the local NE. This information is stored in RAP table.
§
MESA Configuration: configuration of parameters necessary to the addressing of non IS-IS NE in the same domain as the one of local NE. This information are stored in MESA table.
•
IP Configuration Subdivided in: § IP Static Routing Configuration: definition of Host/Network destination address for IP static routing § OSPF area Configuration: definition of Open Shortest Path First address § IP Address Config. Of Point-to Point Interfaces: definition of the Equipment Controller IP address § ISA board IP address: definition of the ISA board IP address • Tunneling Configuration Subdivided in: § OSI over IP: definition of destination IP address for IP for OSI over tunneling § IP over OSI: definition of destination NSAP address and type of IP routing for IP over OSI tunneling All the previously cited operation can be entered choosing the relevant option of the menu, as shown in the figure. The options are described in next paragraphs.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
71/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 40. Comm/Routing options Local Configuration
8.3
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the Local Configuration option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the local address of the NE. The following fields are present: •
a Local Address section contains the following graphical object: § § § §
a Presentation Selector (P.Sel) identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Section Selector (S. Selector) identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Transport Selector (T. Sel) identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The presented value must not be modified. a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format. The AFI filed is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: o The value of AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40 characters). o The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long. o The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long.
In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
72/388
o System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address; level 2, inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. o Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d").
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: o a first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field o a second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address •
•
Synonymous Area Addresses section allows having multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 sub domain. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and if they are inserted, the last two fields, System Id and Network Selector, of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses must be the same. System Type section determines whether the local NE acts as a "intermediate system level 1" or as a "intermediate system level 2" or as a "End System". Note that a level 2 intermediate systems performs functions of a level 1 too. End System is not operative.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
73/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 41. Local Configuration OS Configuration
8.4
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the OS Configuration option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs connected to the local NE. The following fields are present: • •
Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.
Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
74/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 42. OS Configuration NTP Server Configuration
8.5
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then from the cascading menu the NTP Server Configuration option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP (Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE, used for time distribution in the network. The following fields are present: • • •
Enabling NTP Protocol section allows enabling or disabling the NTP Protocol. Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box. Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object of the Local Address Section in the Local Configuration dialog-box.
If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware), the same NSAP address of the OS must be assigned. Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
75/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 43. NTP Server Configuration 8.6
LAPD Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interface Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the LAPD Configuration option. The "LAPD Configuration" dialog opens (this example has one LAPD Interface configured). It contains the following functional block and graphical objects: - A section named LAPD Interfaces List that allows the user: • To display the list of configured LAPD Interfaces using a graphical table; • To change the role of the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List; • To delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD Interface List; • To create a new LAPD Interface - This section contains the following graphical objects: • The number of LAPD interface displayed in the LAPD Interface List; • The LAPD Interface List that lists all the configured LAPD Interfaces; for each LAPD Interfaces, the table displays: - The user label of the TTP containing the configured LAPD Interface (MS/RS TTP); - The LAPD role that contains one of the following value: • User • Network • Delete button that allows to delete the LAPD Interface selected in the LAPD table; • Change Role button that allows too change the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface selected in the table; ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
76/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Create button that allows to create a new LAPD Interface; this button starts a new dialog. Named Create LAPD Interface; it is disabled when the maximum number of LAPD Interface has been configured. This Create LAPD Interface dialog contains the following functional blocks and graphical objects: • A Choose button that allows the operator to select the superior TTP of the LAPD Interface to be created; this button starts the TP Search dialog; the TP Search dialog will be configured in order to display in the right tree only the allowed TTP of the LAPD Interface; • A section LAPD Role that allows configuring the role (User or Network) of the LAPD Interface to be created. This connection is a must to establish connection between two NE's: if one is configured with User role, the other one connected must be configured with Network role. - a section named Search Criteria that allows the user to display only the LAPD's of the selected type in the LAPD Table; the section contains the following graphical objects: • The field Interface Type that allows to select the type of the LAPD's to be displayed in the LAPD Table; the field will manage both ADM and WDM DCC type; the value "Ignore" will allow to display all the LAPD types; • The Search button starts the search of the selected LAPD type; this buttons can be used to refresh the LAPD table too. The LAPD Interface List will be updated on reception of the Delete/Create/Change DCC CTP notification. If no LAPD Interface is configured in the equipment, the message "No LAPD Interface" will be displayed near LAPD Interface counter (that it is at zero)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
77/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 44. LAPD Configuration dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 45. Creation LAPD Interface ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
78/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 46. Confirmation to change LAPD Role 8.7
Ethernet Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing-> Interfaces Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the Ethernet Configuration option. The dialog-box opens (figure below) and allows defining the parameters needed to manage a NE, which provide a LAN Ethernet interface. The following fields and data are present: • • •
Ethernet Interface field allows defining or removing a Local Area Network Port for the access to the Data Communication Network. MAC Address section allows displaying the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN; it is a read-only field. OSI Section: o L2 only Parameter field indicates if the port shall be used for level 2 traffic only, thus avoiding transmitting L1 packets. Note that the flag shall be set to No if some other nodes (NEs or OSs) of the same area of the relevant NE are connected to the Ethernet. o L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64) o L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set (default value for Ethernet is 64)
•
IP Section allows to define the “node”IP Address, IP Mask and the Routing IP Protocol used; If “OSPF” or “Both” options of Routing IP Protocol field are selected, also the “Associated OSPF Area”must be set.
Apply button performs a configuration change of the data. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
79/388
Figure 47. Ethernet Configuration
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
80/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 48. Ethernet Configuration -- L2 only parameter Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration
8.8
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the RAP Configuration option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Reachable Address Prefix table. Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate domain; the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be used. The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device; each page represents a particular element of the RAP table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. In detail, each page contains the following data: •
•
•
Physical Interface button o If the element is empty, displays the "none" value and allows to select a LAPD ports or a LAN port which will be used to reach the addressed area. o If the element isn't empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it. Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domain. The Area Address Prefix represents a NSAP address without the fields System Id and Network Selector. MAC Address section allows addressing the element of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
81/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 49. RAP Configuration 8.9
Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> OSI Routing Configuration option and then from the cascading menu the MESA Configuration option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Manual ES Adjacencies table. Each element of the MESA table allows linking a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a End System element; the ES element must be in the same area as the one of the local NE. If the addressed element is the OS, the LAN port will be used. The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook using the pointing device; each page represents a particular element of the MESA table and the respective pointing device displays the element counter. In detail, each page contains the following data: •
ED
Physical Interface button o If the element is empty, displays the "none" value and allows selecting a LAPD ports or a LAN port, which will be used to reach the End System element. o If the element isn't empty, displays the selected port and allows changing it. 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
82/388
• •
System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element. MAC Address section allows addressing the element in the Ethernet LAN; the field is managed as a simple string of 12 digits.
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 50. MESA Configuration 8.10 IP Configuration The options listed in the menu Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> IP Configuration and also in Configuration –> Comm/Routing –> Tunneling Configuration is relevant to the configuration of messages communications for the management of ATM or IP boards (ISA) inside the equipment and in the network.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
83/388
8.10.1 IP routing configuration for ATM/IP boards management In order to manage the ATM/IP boards inserted into the equipment, the following operations are to be done: •“IP Address Configuration of Point–to–Point Interface ”defines the IP address for the Equipment–Controller (EC). This should be the first addressing operation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•Routing configuration, by means of the options: –“IP Static Routing Configuration”if using static routing –“OSPF Area Configuration”if using the automatic OSPF routing •“ISA Board IP Address”it defines the IP address for the ATM or IP boards (ISA); it is to be defined for every ISA board hosted by the equipment. NOTE: if the ISA boards are in EPS 1+1 configuration, they must have the same address) •“IP over OSI Tunneling”it defines the OSI address (NSAP) of the destination node to be reached (for instance the GNE connected to the TMN), when the ATM/IP management message passes through an SDH/OSI network; i.e. it is to be done for every SDH–NE of the network, if equipped with ATM/IP boards. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel, so that they can see each other. •“OSI over IP Tunneling”it defines the IP address of the destination node to be reached (for instance the IP router where the TMN is connected), when an OSI management message passes through an IP network. It is to be defined on a a Gateway Network Element (GNE) equipped with the QB3 interface, where the QB3 is connected to a LAN/IP network. NOTE: this addressing must be carried out at both end nodes of the tunnel, so that they can see each other. 8.11 IP Static Routing Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Static Routing Configuration option. The dialog box opens and allows configuring the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration. The following fields and data are present: [1] Destination Host IP Address: allows defining the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host [2] Destination Network: it is alternative to Destination Host IP Address; allows defining the IP Address IP Mask to reach a network. [3] Default Gateway IP Address: allows defining the address of the next hop gateway [4] CLNP (Connection Less Network Protocol): allows to use a pre-define IP over OSI tunnel to towards a gateway. [5] IP Point-to-Point Interface Id: allows to use point to point interfaces made available by EC. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
84/388
N.B. Points from [3] to [5] are alternative Apply button is used to perform a configure change of the data contained in the column of the table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 51. IP Static Routing Configuration 8.12 OSPF Area Table Configuration Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing -> IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSPF Area Table Configuration option. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
85/388
The dialog-box opens and allows configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Area Table Configuration. The following fields and data are present:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
OSPF Area IP Address OSPF Area Range Mask
Both fields gives a synthetically information that includes all the addresses (specific a NE and to a Network) in an Area. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 52. OSPF Area Table Configuration 8.13
IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces option. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the Equipment Controller IP address used to communicate with the ISA board.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
86/388
OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 53. IP Address Configuration of Point-to-Point Interfaces 8.14 ISA board IP Address Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->IP Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the ISA Board IP Address option. The dialog-box opens and allows setting the IP Address of the ISA Board that communicate with the Equipment Controller (EC). OK button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialog-box and closes it; the dialog is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
87/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 54. ISA Board IP Address 8.15 OSI over IP Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the OSI over IP option. The dialog-box opens (Figure below) and allows configuring the Remote Destination IP Address of the Equipment Controller.
Figure 55. OSI over IP Tunneling configuration ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
88/388
Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page. Delete button is used to delete the selected page. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. 8.16 IP over OSI
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Coo/Routing->Tunneling Configuration and then from the cascading menu, the IP over OSI option. The dialog-box opens and allows configuring the Destination NAPS Address and the IP Routing Type. The following fields are present: •
Destination NAPS Address: A Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first field of the NSAP address. AFI determines the NSAP format. The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the length of NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters: • •
The value of AFI 39 identifies the ISO-DCC format of 40 characters long The value of AFI 47 identifies the GOSIP-V2 format of 40 characters long
In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are: •
•
System Id: uniquely identifies a NE in an area and is 12 characters long. It might be the equipment MAC Ethernet address; level 2, inserted in the NE or the operator might select it. Network Selector: provides the distinction among users of the network service and is 2 characters long (value is "1d")
In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting because of the variable format: • •
•
IP Routing: allows to choose the type of IP routing supported as follows; • • • •
ED
A first string of two characters that identifies the AFI field A second string of variable length that identifies the remaining NSAP address
01
OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) Both None
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
89/388
If "OSPF" or "Both" options are selected, also the "Associated OSPF Area" must be set. Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete table and close the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed. New button is used to insert a new page
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
Figure 56. IP over OS
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
90/388
9
Equipment Management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
9.1
Introduction and navigation
This section deals mainly with the setting and changing of the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking board protection operations. Using the menu options, select the Equipment option from the View pull down menu The first level of the "Equipment Overview" representation will be displayed directly into the current window The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy. Navigation is done from higher to lower levels. The NE hierarchy is organized in the following way: subrack > board > port > TP Double clicking on the objects performs the navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy: • • • •
The first level shows the subrack level of the Equipment view; Further, by double clicking on a board body, the board level of the Equipment view can be reached. Further, by double clicking on a port body contained in the board, the port level of the Equipment view can be reached. The port view displays the inner TPs. It is possible to go back to the upper level of representation by pressing the key on the keyboard; It is also possible to: • •
Go back to the previous view, by selecting the Backward option from the views menu Go to the next view, by selecting the Forward option from the view menu
N.B. Selecting in the first level of the Equipment view (subrack level) The Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Rack level view is presented; further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is presented. In the Rack level view, two subrack are presented: • •
At the top the 1662SMC Subrack, named SR62C At the bottom the Fans Subrack, na med SRFAN The Fans Subrack presence is managed with the Set option as for the boards of the 1662SMC Subrack
Further, selecting in the Rack level view the Show supporting equipment option from the Equipment menu, the Equipment level view is presented.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
91/388
Figure 57. Equipment Overview -- Subracks level
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
92/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 58. Equipment Overview -- Rack level (without Fans subrack)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
93/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 59. Equipment Overview- Rack level (with Fans subrack)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
94/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 60. Equipment Overview - NE level In the Subrack view it is possible use the options offered by the Equipment menu clicking on it in the menu bar. Alarms indications are present at every NE level. Details about these alarms indication are given in the Maintenance section. All the options offered by equipment menu are described in the next paragraphs. Set and change the boards present on the Equipment is the main function. Board administrative state that decides on the "in/out of service" of the board is also described.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
95/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 61. Equipment menu Equipment setting operation are defined according the following sequences: - Configuration of a new board •
-
Configure the board using the option "Set"
Change of board type • •
-
"Set out of service" the board Configure the board using the option "Set"
Remove a board • •
9.2
"Set out of service" the board "Remove" the board Set and change or remove board/subrack
The boards can be set, changed or removed using the menu options of the Equipment view. a ) Setting or changing a board/subrack A new board/subrack may be created in either an empty slot or it may replace an existing Out of Service board/subrack (without the lock symbol). In fact, the Set option is available only after selecting an empty slot or an Out-of-service board. •
• •
ED
Click on the empty slot in which a board/subrack has to be added, or on an existing Out of Service board in order to change it. The contour becomes highlighted to show that operatio ns can be done on it. Select the Set option of the Equipment pull down menu. The following example of dialogue box containing a list of the different types of boards/subrack is displayed.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
96/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 62. The list of different boards relative to an NE slot (example) N.B. The list of boards/subrack displayed during a "Set Board" operation is restricted to those, which the equipment may accept in the selected slot. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot has been selected.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
97/388
For details on the board/subrack identified by acronyms and NE physical composition please refers to the Technical Handbook. • •
Choose the board/subrack type required, by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the board is highlighted. Click on the OK push button to validate the choice. The board/subrack representation appears on the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective. A lock representation appears over the boards ("in-service")
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
In the Create/Modify dialogue box, the Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. The Help push button opens a Help view giving information about the context. b) Removing a board/subrack
•
Click on the board/subrack to remove. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot.
• • •
If the slot you are working on is already empty no name appears under the slot. Select the Remove option the Equipment pull down menu. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the "Remove" operation. N.B. It is possible remove a board only if it is not involved in any type of cross connection (OH bytes included) or Performance monitoring. c) Modify a board N.B. This procedure can be done to replace an existing optical module with another of different type without previously remove it.
• • • • • •
9.3
Click on the optical module to replace. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted to show that operation can be done on it. Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu. A dialog box containing a list of different types of optical module is displayed. Chose the optical module type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list; the name of the module is highlighted. Click on OK push button to validate the choice. The board representation appears on the N.E. view in the slot when the board change is effective. A padlock representation appears over the board. Connect Fan to CONGI board
This command enable the Fan Subrack alarms management from CONGI in slot 10 or slot 12 according to the option selected in the Equipment menu. Figure below. Shows an example Select the CONGI board
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
98/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
To enable this function select the Connect Fan to CONGI#10 option (or as alternative Connect Fan to CONGI#12) of the Equipment menu if the supervision Fan Subrack cable is connected to CONGI unit inserted in slot 10.
Figure 63. Connect FAN to CONGI It is possible to disable this function by selecting the relevant CONGI board and than choosing the Remove Fan connection from CONGI#10 option of the Equipment menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
99/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 64. Remove FAN connection from CONGI 9.4
Board administrative state
The operator decides to set a board in service or out of service, if the NE allows it. N.B. In the equipment view, a lock representation appears over the boards which are in "in service" state. 9.4.1 • •
Setting a board in service In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it. Select the Set in service option of the Equipment pull down menu. A lock representation appears over the boards.
9.4.2 •
ED
Setting a board out of service In the Subrack NE view, click on the board in order to select it.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
100/388
•
Select the Set out of service option of the Equipment pull down menu. Select the Ok push button in the confirmation window that appears. A lock representation disappears, substituted by the symbol
over the boards..
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
9.4.3 Consulting a Board's Administrative state The board's administrative ("in service" or "out of service") state is indicated on the board view as shown in the following figure.
Figure 65. Consulting a board’s administrative state
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
101/388
9.5
Software description
This function allows the operator to visualize information about the software(s) which is (are) present in the selected board. •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Click on a board in which the software is wanted to know (EQUICO or MATRIX unit). The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot. Select the Software description option of the Equipment pull down menu.
Opened dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as there is software in the selected board. Click on the Close push button to close the dialogue box.
Figure 66. Software Description dialogue box. 9.6
Remote Inventory
This command displays the remote inventory data present in the Subrack and Boards. •
Select the Remote Inventory option of the Equipment pull down menu. Two options are available:
• •
ED
Subrack level: prints or write on a file the remote inventory data of the subrack. Board level: show the remote inventory data of the selected board
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
102/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
For the Board level a dialog similar to Figure below. Appear.
Figure 67. Remote Inventory The remote inventory data of the Subrack level can be printed on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
103/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 68. Select Printer N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
Figure 69. Select Output Format for file 9.7
Show supporting equipment
Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Equipment menu to navigate to the equipment that supports the selected board.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
104/388
Figure 70. Equipment Overview -- Subrack level
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
105/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
10 Board view
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
10.1 Introduction The Board View permits to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port view. The "Board view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu, then double clicking on the selected board to show the relevant Board view, presenting the ports. In case of board with multi access SDH another view permits to select the SDH port. An example of "board view" with the presented port is in Figure 72. Alarms and Status indications referred to the board level are present at the bottom of the view, as indicated in the example (Administrative State and Board Alarms/Status). This information are "In/Out of service" of the board (Administrative State) and board alarms and status like "missing" (RUM) or "mismatch" (RUTM), EPS condition if supported and other indications typical of each unit. In the Maintenance section details on this indication are given.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
106/388
Figure 71. Equipment view: select the SDH port on a board
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
107/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 72. Example of a Board View A port type is described with a board rectangular view and port identification. The port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board (see Figure below. one example of optical port)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
108/388
(SDH) (ATM or IP) (PDH) (GBit ETHERNET) Figure 73. Example of a Port identification and alarm synthesis
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The following information is available: • • •
Type of port (name) State of port (alarm status synthesis) Symbol of the port
The operator is provided with a representation of the port alarm synthesis on each port. The messages displayed at the top view provide port denomination. The messages displayed at the bottom provide information about Board alarms. A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type or the alarms name. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view. By double clicking on a board view, it is also possible open the corresponding port view. 10.2 Board View Menu Selecting the "Board" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Board menu is presented: •
Port Access: Access the "Port" view.
Note: this option is accessible after the selection of a port contained in the view. • • •
Change Physical Interface: Change the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI (and vice versa) on the bi- mode port (140Mbit/s / STM-1 switchable). Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level. ISA Port Configuration: It allows configuring the TPs for the ATM connections.
Figure 74. Board menu options These options are described in next paragraphs. 10.2.1 Port Access Click on Port Access menu option of the Board menu to access the "Port View" Navigation to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set the releva nt configurations.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
109/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 75. After “Port Access”selection (example) 10.2.2 Change Physical Interface This command allows to change the type of physical interface in a bi- mode port (140 Mbit/s / 155 Mbit/s switchable port) i.e. it cha nges the SPI or PPI object into PPI or SPI Select the Symbol of the port in the "Board view". Click on Change Physical Interface menu option of the Board menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
110/388
Figure 76. Change Physical Interface
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The following dialog box is opened:
Click on the OK push button to change the physical interface. Click on the Cancel push button to abort the change of the physical interface. 10.2.3 Show supporting equipment Click on Show Supporting Equipment menu option of the Board menu to navigate to the subrack that supports the selected port view.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
111/388
Figure 77. Subrack level
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
112/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
11 Port view
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
11.1 Introduction This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of each port. The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (i.e. the Termination Point, TP) referred to the specific Port; it permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the available menu permits to configure the port, (many setting options listed in the port menu are common with the "Transmission" view). In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA, ATM/IP/ETH). The Port View can be accessed from the Equipment or Transmission Views. The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu then double clicking on the presented rack/subrack to present the subrack view, as described in chapter "Show supporting equipment" Double clicking on the selected board the relevant Board view is available presenting the ports. By double clicking on a board view, the corresponding port view is opened. The "Port view" is also reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. Then the Add TP option of the Transmission menu permits to select and confirm a TP. On the transmission view, which appears, select the TP and on the Transmission menu select the Navigate to a port view option. The HOA port view can only be reached from the Transmission view, selecting a VC or TU TP. The ATM/IP/ETH TPs are not automatically created when the board is inserted in the subrack but must be created as explained in chapter ATM/IP/ETH Configuration From the Port view It is possible to Navigate to Transmission view. The port types contain the following TP: •SDH port: Electrical or Optical SPI TTP, RS TTP, prot TTP (MSP TTP), AU4 CTP, Trail Monitor (only with enabled POM) •PDH port: PPI TTP, En CTP, VCn TTP •HOA port: VC4 TTP, TUG3, TUG2, TU3, TU12, Trail Monitoring (only with enabled POM) •ATM port: VC4C TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP and E1 TTP •PR_EA port: VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP •Fast ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC3XV, VC12XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP •Gigabit ETHERNET port: MAU, PTC, VC4XV, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP and VC12 TTP
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
113/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 78. Example of a SDH Port View On the port view, the messages displayed at the top view in the form of message boxes provide more information concerning the type and the alarms of the port. On the other hand the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about MSP protection and ALS state (if they are supported). A message under the mouse facility provides the name and the port type. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
114/388
11.2 Port View: elements on the TP The symbols of the TPs have the following meaning: •
Alarm Icon Area The icon boxes represent alarms. The color of the boxes changes according to the alarm severity.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
TP Role The icon boxes represent the function: Adaptation, Termination or Compound Adaptation and Termination.
•
Cross-connected state If the condition of the resource is cross-connected, an icon with a x appears beneath the box.
•
Performance State If the condition of the resource is under performance monitoring, an icon with a P appears beneath the box.
•
Loop state If the condition of the resource is under loop, an icon with a L appears beneath the box
•
Selected state An orange frame around the box identifies the TP selection, so port menu refers to the selected TP.
Figure 79. Termination TP box.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
115/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 80. G.783 Adaptation TP box. 11.3 Port View Menu Selecting the "Port" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Port menu is presented. The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH, HOA and ATM), and is introduced in the following: •
TP configuration: Set parameters for the Signal Label and Path Trace overhead on
Synchronous TP's. • • • • • • • • • • • • •
ED
TP Threshold Configuration: Set B2 excessive BER and Signal Degraded parameter TP Frame Configuration: Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDN-PRA management. Set Retiming: Enable/disable the retiming feature on the outgoing 2 Mbit/s signal. AU4 Concatenation: Only for SDH ports views. Cross Connection: Manage the connection of the paths. Monitoring Operations: Set parameters for POM/SUT and TC (Tandem Connection) TPs. Not available for PDH port. Performance: See and Show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Loopback: Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Physical Media: Manage the physical setting of the TP of the port. Not applicable to HOA port. It is described in the following paragraph. Show supporting board: Navigate to the upper board level. It is described in this chapter. Navigate to Transmission view: permit to show a complete overview about the signal flow, opening all TP's Navigate to Monitor view: permit to show an overview about the monitoring operation (POM, SUT, TC) all TP's.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
116/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 81. Examples of port menu options (SDH, PDH and ATM port) 11.4 Set Retiming The Retiming feature applies to the outgoing 2 Mbit/s and its purpose is absorb the jitter / wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occur. The feature is set individually per port. Select a 2Mbit/s port and zoom in to open the port view. When the Retiming feature is disabling, the color of the state information at the bottom of the window is brown and the label "Retiming State Disable" is written. Select the Set Retiming->Enable option from the Port menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
117/388
Figure 82. Set Retiming enable (before)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
As result of this operation the state information color become green and the label "Retiming State Enable" is written
Figure 83. Set Retiming enable (after) 11.5 AU4 Concatenation Select a STM-16 or STM-4 optical interface to configure as AU4 concatenation structure. Zoom in to open the board and then the port view menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
118/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the AU4 Concatenation option from the Port menu to open Figure below. (In this example a STM-16 view is shown) The STM-16 stream appears divided into different groups: not all AU4s can be chosen as first AU4 but only AU4#1 AU4#5, AU4#9, AU4#13 for AU4c. Therefore for concatenated action of for AU4s in one AU4c these AU4 streams are deleted and substituted by the new AU4c component. Select the supported concatenation Number =4 (selection 64 is not operative) to visualize the available group/groups then select the group to concatenate and click on the Concatenate push button. Click on the Cancel key to exit and come back to the previous window.
Figure 84. AU4 concatenate/deconcatenate commands ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
119/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Concatenate button will be enabled and the Deconcatenate button will be disabled when is selected a non concatenated AU4, vice versa when is selected a concatenated AU4.
Figure 85. Examp le of a concatenated AU4 transmission view The port view represented in Figure up. Shows an STM4 interface with four AU4 concatenated in one AU4c. The AU4c appears as a single icon that has the same size of the actual AU4 blocks. The AU4c streams support the Alarm synthesis, Cross-Connection states and Performance Monitoring information as standard AU4 streams.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
120/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
To deconcatenate an AU4c select again the "AU4 Concatenation" option in the Port View menu and then select the AU4c to deconcatenate. Click on the Deconcatenate push button to apply the command or on Cancel to exit.
Figure 86. Example of a concatenated AU4c 11.6 Physical Media option menu The Port -> Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP of the port. The Physical Media options are also accessible from the Transmission menu. It opens a menu that differs according the port type: •
SDH port: - ALS Management - Show Optical Configuration - Tx Quality Configuration - Single Fiber Configuration - LAPD Configuration - Ms Configuration
•
PDH port: - Line Length Configuration. - HDSL Configuration. Not operative
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
121/388
- NT G703/704 Configuration. . Not operative - NT X21 Configuration. . Not operative •
ETHERNET port: - Remote Laser Management. Not operative
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- ALS Management. Not operative - Ethernet Port Configuration - Ethernet Mapping Protocol. - ATM/IP/ETH Configuration - Control Path Activation. These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
Figure 87. Physical media menu (SDH port example) 11.6.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration The aim of this paragraph is to describe the optical port hence the laser sources. Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) is useful in case of a loss of communication between two NEs due to optical fiber breakdown. For safety reasons it may be necessary to shutdown the laser to enable the fixing of the communication link. The automatic laser shutdown function can only be configured from the optical ports of the equipment. Select the SPI block in the port view and then select the Port pull down menu. Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the ALS Management option. The Automatic Laser Shutdown State dialogue box opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
122/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 88. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management The dialogue box enables the ALS Management and the Restart parameters. The following actions are available a) Allow Automatic Laser Shutdown. To allow the automatic laser shutdown functionality, select the ALS Enabled option of the ALS Function: option button. b) Forcing the Laser to start or stop. When the laser is forced to ON or OFF, it is restarted or stopped and the Automatic Laser Shutdown is disabled, if it was not already so. 1) Force la ser ON. To carry out a laser forced ON, select the Laser Forced ON option of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue. 2) Force laser OFF.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
123/388
To carry out a laser forced OFF, select the Laser Forced OFF optio n of the ALS Function then click on Apply and then or close push button to close the dialogue c) Delete: this option deactivates the ALS function, returning to the state.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
From this window it is only possible to create the ALS function (all ALS commands are grey)
Figure 89. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management (after ALS Function delete) d) Enabling or Disabling Automatic / Manual Laser Restart. To enable (disable) an automatic laser restart following an automatic laser shutdown (periodic restart), select the Enabled (Disabled) option of the ALS Auto Restart . The laser will be ON for 2 secs and OFF for 70 secs, in periodic mode. The same procedure is applicable for the ALS Manual restart: while the ALS auto Restart is disabled, the manual restart permits to permits to perform a laser restart for single time period. e) Wait to restart time The Wait To Restart Time: field indicating the delay period in seconds, occurring before an automatic laser restart is launched (following an automatic shutdown). The restart time period for this equipment is fixed to 70 secs. f) ALS Manual restart When the ALS Manual Restart is Enabling it is possible to enter two different commands: Manual or Test Restart. The manual command immediately activates a single laser restart: this command overrides the wait to restart time. The test restart is similar to the manual restart but the laser remains "ON" for a longer time in order to make a measurement of the received optical power.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
124/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
When all the different parameters have been configured, select the Apply button to confirm the setting and close the dialogue box. Selecting only the Close button allows you to cancel the choices made. Note that the ALS procedure is activated ( if enable ) only when the fiber has been interrupted and the ALS state has not to be confused with the laser state. ALS states (see example of), displayed by the functional state message area of the optical port, are: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. Active = The ALS has been activated (On). Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
Figure 90. ALS and Laser current state (example) 11.6.2 Show Optical Configuration This command permits to get detailed information on the optical characteristics of the port that is visualized. Firstly select an optical board and the SPI block, then click on Show Optical Configuration option from the Physical media pull down menu to visualize the parameters of the selected optical port. Shows an example of the parameters of the selected interface. N.B. This dialogue box can only be read. You cannot write in the entry boxes.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
125/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 91. Visualizing a port optical parameters The laser ports are identified by three major characteristics: • • •
STM Level: describes the input/output optical interface types: STM1/STM4 The wavelength of the laser source : the units are nanometers (nm = 10-9 m). The use of the port : describes whether the laser port is used for interoffice transmissions on long distances (Long Haul) 40 km) or for interoffice transmissions on short distances (Short Haul ] 15 km).
The Colored Interface Parameters section is not applicable in the current release To close the dialogue box click on the Cancel push button. 11.6.3 Single Fibber Configuration The single fiber configuration can be realized with passive optical couplers. The optical coupler must not loop the Tx signal onto the local Rx. For this purpose and in general to avoid a low Tx/Rx decoupling also when the optical line is interrupted, an identification label has been assigned to the local Tx side; the Rx part in the remote receive side checks the congruency between the received and the expected labels. If a signal label mismatch is recognized on the received section, an alarm (AIS and RDI) will be generated. Example of Figure below. Shows that are accepted the label "1" from Tx1 to Rx2 while is accepted label "2" from Tx2 to Rx1.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
126/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 92. Bidirectional Transmission on a single fiber Select the Physical media option and then from the cascading menu the SDH Single Fiber Configuration option. In the figure that opens, the following fields have to be considered: • •
Allow Single Fiber - select the transmit mode on the single fiber (enable or disable). Transmitted Section: • •
Transmitted Media Byte - assigned label to Tx (0-14) Transmitted Media Type - overhead byte used for the communication: - Media Dependent byte of Regeneration Section or - S1 byte of Multiplex Section (the part not used for the SSM)
•
Received Section: • •
ED
01
Received label Expected label (0-14)
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
127/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 93. Single Fiber Configuration View 11.6.4 Ms Configuration The Ms Configuration menu allows the SS bit provisioning for Multiplex Section Object (MSTTP) in SONET/SDH network interworking. Select the MSP TP. Click on Ms Configuration menu option of the Port menu. This dialog allows selecting between SDH or SONET networks. After the selection click on Apply and then on Close to close the dialog. Ms Forced AIS is not supported in the current release.
Figure 94. Ms Configuration 11.6.5 Line Length Configuration To manage the Line Length configuration click on Line Length Configuration menu option of the Physical Media menu. This dialog allows configuring the line length for a PDH PPI TP of a 45 Mbit/s port. The OK button validates the configuration and closes the dialog box. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
128/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Cancel button removes the dialog
Figure 95. PDH Line Length Configuration View 11.6.6 Ethernet Port Configuration To set Ethernet port parameters, select the Ethernet Port Configuration option of the Port -> Physical Media menu as shown in Figure below.
Figure 96. Ethernet Port Configuration options ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
129/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Subsequently Figure below. Will be opened.
Figure 97. Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog For the Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) port it is possible to choose between two “Configuration Type”: 1. Auto navigation “: enable allows to configure the "Rate" to be negotiated (10 or 100 Mb/s). The "Directionality" (Full Duplex) and the "Flow Control" (Activated) are always enabled and can't be changed. 2. "Manual”: allows forcing the "Rate" at 10 or 100 Mb/s. The "Directionality" is always Full Duplex Moreover It is possible to Restart the “Auto Negotiation” by depressing the relevant button; if parameters has been changed before pressing the Restart button, a question dialog is displayed to advice that the user has changed data but not applied them.
Figure 98. Information dialog In read only mode there are indicatio n if the Auto negotiation on remote side is activated (Remote ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
130/388
Auto Negotiation) and what parameters are allowed on remote (Remote Allowed Parameters).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In both cases is possible to check the “Auto negotiation Current State”with the possible massage: –Completed OK –Completed KO –Configuring –Deactivated –Parallel Defect Fail –Other At the bottom of the port view are displayed the following indications): –The “Interface Type”: •S1000 Base SX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) •S1000 Base LX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) •S1000CX (only for Gigabit Ethernet board) •S100BaseTX •S100BaseFX •Unknown •S10BaseT –The “Bit Rate”(only for fast Ethernet board): •10 Mb/s •100 Mb/s
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
131/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 99. Gigabit Ethernet port view (example) 11.6.7 Ethernet Mapping Protocol Select a VC TP. Click on PortEthernet Mapping Protocol option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. Figure below opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
132/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 100. Ethernet Mapping Protocol (EXAMPLE) This dialog aims to show the actual Ethernet mapping protocol used and allowing the user to change it. The options available are the following: –FAST ETHERNET boards: •GFP null extension Header with FCS •GFP null extension Header without FCS •GFP for packed concatenation extended –GIGABIT ETHERNET boards: •GFP null extension Header with FCS •GFP null extension Header without FCS 11.6.8 Control Path Activation This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port virtualTPs. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window. Click on Control Path Activation option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ISA/IP/ETH configuration”window. This dialog aims to show the activation state of the virtualTPs present in the Ethernet Port View and to change the number of virtualTPs active. The Active state is reached by choosing the number of “Virtual TPs to be active”and click on the Apply button.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
133/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 101. Control Path Activation (example on Fast Ethernet board) On the contrary to change in Idle the Active state of a TP decrease the “Virtual TPs to be active” field and then and click on the Apply button. Click on the Refresh button to update the changes. Click on Close button to close the Control Path Activation window. Example figure below is the Active state.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
134/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
11.6.9 LCAS Configuration This dialog allows modifying the state of the Ethernet port. Select a TP in the Ethernet port view window. Click on LCAS Configuration option of the Port–> Physical Media menu. A new window will be opened; a similar window is display when a new concatenated VCX is created in the “ISA/IP/ETH configuration”window. This dialog aim is LCAS (Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme) protocol management of the TPs present in the Ethernet Port View. The button "Apply" will set the configuration if the LCAS protocol is enabled. In the following picture we can note that are managed all the attributes described before and the two actions are managed by means of the two buttons (Enable/Disable and Monitoring...).
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
135/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 102. LCAS Configuration The "Monitoring..." button start the "LCAS protocol monitoring" view like the figure below.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
136/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 103. LCAS Monitoring 11.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access (PRA) and G.703/G.704 frame management. PRA management The PRA functionality performs termination bi–directional function for Time Slot 0 on framed with CRC–4 2 Mbit/s signal. In detail, it extracts in sink direction and writes in source direction particular bits (E, Sa5, Sa6 and A) of the Time Slot 0. Moreover, it generates substitution frames in case of detection of LOS on the signal coming from a Terminal Equipment. The PRA functionality has been extended in order to manage proprietary handling of the bits of Time Slot 0 (Framed with leased line PRA option) in terms of state, defect detection and consequent actions. G.703/G.704 management This functionality allows to activate the adaptation function to process a framed (G.704 interface) or not framed (G.703 interface) 2Mbit/s signal. This TP Frame Mode Configuration option is available for: –P12–CTP Select the desired P12–CTP and then the Port –>TP Frame Mode Configuration option. TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the “Transmission”and ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
137/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
“Synchronization”view menu. The following dialog appears:
Figure 104. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: –”Framed Signal Mode”that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode; the user can choose one of the following value: •”Not Framed” (G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activated; •“Framed without PRA”(G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300–233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect detection and consequent action; •”Framed with PRA”: PRA function is activated •”Framed with leased line PRA”: a proprietary leased line behavior is applied. –“CRC4 Status“that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe: •“Operation”: allows to configure the CRC–4 processing modalities; the possible value are: •“Disabled”that disables the CRC–4 •“Forced”that configures CRC–4 with consequent actions •“Automatic”that triggers the CRC–4 algorithms in order to allow interworking of pieces of equipment with and without a CRC4 capability. •“Monitoring Enabling”: enable or disable the CRC–4 error counting •”Remote Indication”: read–only field that indicates if status of CRC–4 error counting ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
138/388
functionality of far–end NE is enabled or disabled. –“Loss of Synch Consequent Action”allows to perform the consequent action on the transmitted 2M/s signal with retiming when the CRU is in Holdover or Free running mode; the consequent action is performed only if PRA or leased line application ha been configured on the associated P12–CTP.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
–“Frame Status”is a read–only field that reports an indication of the received signal: •”No indication” •“The 2Mb/s signal is multi–frame” Press Ok to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog. 11.8 Show Supporting Board Select a TP. Click on Show Supporting Board menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the board that supports the selected port view. Figure below. (Example) opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
139/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 105. Board View Example. 11.9 Navigate to Transmission View Select a TP. Click on Navigate to Transmission View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Transmission View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Transmission view permits to show a complete overview about the signal flow as for the example of the following figure.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
140/388
Figure 106. “Navigate to Transmission view”selection
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
141/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 107. After “Navigate to Transmission view”selection 11.10 Navigate to Monitoring View Select a TP where are configured some Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC) Click on Navigate to Monitoring View menu option of the Port menu to navigate to the corresponding Monitoring View that is related to the selected TP. Navigation to the Monitoring view permits to show a complete overview about the Monitoring Operations (POM, SUT, TC) as for the example of the following figure. In Figure below is shown an example of Monitoring View of a TP with POM and TCM both before and after matrix. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
142/388
Figure 108. View of Monitoring Operations (example)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
143/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
12 Equipment Protection management (EPS)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
12.1 Introduction It is unthinkable to launch a telecommunications system, handling millions of communications, without the possibility of replacing equipment in a real time way, consequent to equipment failure. Everything must be done so that the communications can continue smoothly and so that the equipment failure remains transparent to the users. Protection management deals with this aspect of the EML-USM. Switching the board supporting the protected service when this board fails to a protecting board capable of supporting the same service performs the protection. This protection is realized according to a protection scheme. An equipment protection scheme is composed of the following parameters, which can be configured: •
Group type: 1+1 or 1+n The group type specifies if one or more unreliable resources for protection can be assigned to one or more reliable resources. 1+1 group type means that one protecting unit protects a working element. 1+n group type means that only one protecting unit protects n working elements.
•
Protection priority: A priority can be assigned to protected units in 1+n protection schemes. This priority can be 1, 2, ... or n, 1 being the highest priority.
•
Configuration type: revertive or non revertive In revertive mode, a protected service will be switched back to its protected element when it has recovered from its failure. In non-revertive mode, the switch to the protecting element is maintained even after a recovery from failure.
•
Protection wait to restore time: Used when revertive mode is active, the protection wait to restore time prevents several protection switches due to an intermittent failure. A protected element must be fault free during this fixed period of time before a protected service is switched back to it.
Board duplication remains the easiest way to ensure equipment protection in a system. The actions that can be undertaken are of the following type: • •
ED
Consult and modify an Equipment Protection Scheme (EPS), Force Switch EPS,
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
144/388
In Board view, the board whose content is represented is considered as implicitly selected. The functional state message area of the boards involved in an equipment protection scheme displays EPS protection states. 12.2 Management: consulting and modifying EPS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In order to consult EPS, perform the following operations: The "Port view" is reached selecting the Equipment option in the View pull down menu to present the subrack view. • •
Select the Equipment option in the View pull down menu. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Management...
Figure 109. Consulting EPS The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 110. EPS Management dialogue box The EPS Management dialogue box shows the current NE protection schemes in the left side . The list gives for each protecting board the protected board(s). The available protection schemes are coherent with the NE type and release. The right side of the dialogue box allows modifying the EPS configuration. The current release of this NE fixes the following protection: •
N+1 (with N 6) "P63E1 or P63E1N" protection - Board of slot MAIN (protected): P63E1 or P63E1N, slots 24-27-30-33-36-39
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
145/388
- Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P63E1 or P63E1N, slot 32 •
N+1 (with N 15) "P3E3/T3" protection - Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4E3/T3, from slot 25 to 39 - Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P3E3/T3, from slot 24 to 38
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
N+1 (with N 15) "P4ES1N" protection - Board of slot MAIN (protected): P4ES1N, from slot 25 to 39 - Board of slot SPARE (protecting): P4ES1N, from slot 24 to 38
N.B. For P3E3/T3 and P4ES1N more than one protection group N+1 revertive can be created, depending on the equipment configuration. The spare board position can be assigned in a flexible way. The only constraint is the following: • • • • •
The access card corresponding to the protecting board must be an HPROT card The HPROT card has to be plugged at the left side of the access card group The main/spare boards have to be adjacent The protecting board has to be plugged at the left side of the protected group of boards The protecting/protected group of ports have to be of the same type
•
1+1 "ATM MATRIX 4x4" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. This does not apply to the local STM-1 interface so the traffic on it is lost. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way; no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present.
•
1+1 "ATM MATRIX 8x8" protection The ATM MATRIX board can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ATM MATRIX and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against ATM module failure. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position can be assigned in a flexible way; no restriction for position of main and spare ATM MATRIX is present.
•
1+1 ISA PR_EA (PREA4ETH, PREA1GBE)”protection The ISA PR_EA boards can be protected in 1+1 equipment protection scheme. In this configuration the ISA PR_EA and all indirect interfaces connected to it are protected against module failure. This does not apply to the local interface so the traffic on it is lost. A maximum of two protection group 1+1 not revertive can be created. The spare card position
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
146/388
can be assigned in a flexible way; no restrictions for position of main and spare ISA PR_EA are present. •
1+1 "MATRIX" protection - Board of slot 23, MATRIX main (protected)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- Board of slot 40, MATRIX spare (protecting) N.B. For each type of failure on the MATRIX main board (CRU, Shelf Controller) a switch is performed to the spare boards The MATRIX protection is automatically presented in the left side of the dialog box when the SPARE MATRIX is created in the Set option of the Equipment menu. It is not created with the EPS menu described in this chapter. This right side is divided into two parts. The upper part provides a message field with the name of the Protecting board and a choose button to display the list of boards available. The lower part provides a list to display the Protected boards currently in the displayed scheme. A choose button is provided to display the list of boards which could be added as protected. A delete button enables user to remove a protected board from a scheme. a) Scheme displaying To display a specific scheme, user selects an item on the left list. This operation fills the protecting element text field and the protected list with the board user name. If user clicks where there is no item displayed, the right part is displayed empty. The Cancel push button closes the dialog box. b) Scheme creation To create a new protection scheme, don't click on item in the left list. In this way the right part is displayed empty and the Choose Protecting button is sensitive. Press this button to displays a window to choose a board in the "Board Selection" list. The board are listed opening the NE>rack>subrack levels. After that operation, Choose Protecting button becomes insensitive and Choose Protected becomes sensitive. The user can add, always using the same "Board Selection" list dialogue box presented, as many protected boards as wanted. When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog box and create the scheme (the new list is update re-opening the EPS Management dialogue box). The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box. c) Scheme deletion To delete an existing protection scheme, the user selects a scheme in the left list. Using the Delete button, user could delete the scheme. d) Scheme modification To modify an existing protection scheme by adding or removing protection units, the user selects a scheme in the left list. Using Choose button for protected elements, user could add protected boards.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
147/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
By selecting a protected board and using the Delete Protected button, user could remove protected elements from scheme. When the right part of window is correctly filled, the OK button close the dialog box and modify the scheme. The Cancel push button cancels the creation and closes the dialog box.
Figure 111. EPS: board selection
Figure 112. EPS: choose protected The EPS functional state of a board selected in the board view is displayed at the bottom of the view as shown in the following figures.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
148/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 113. EPS functional state from protected active board view
Figure 114. EPS functional state from protecting active board view 12.3 Configuration: revertive and WTR for EPS This functionality configures Revertive and Wait Time to restore in a protection scheme. In order to configure, perform the following operations: • •
Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Configure.
Figure 115 Configure EPS The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 116. EPS Management dialogue box The dialog box provides configuration for elements such as: ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
149/388
• • • • •
The name of the protecting element as a label The Equipment Type (board) of the protecting element as a label A list displaying the protected elements owned by the scheme The Revertive Mode flag as an option menu. The available values are revertive and non revertive The wait time to restore time value (steps of 30 seconds, from 60 to 600). Only for N+1 EPS.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Notes: in the current release the Wait Time to Restore is fixed to 5 minutes. For this NE: • • • • • • •
1+1 ATM MATRIX 4x4 is Not Revertive only 1+1 ATM MATRIX 8x8 is Not Revertive only 1+1 PR_EA is Not Revertive only 1+1 MATRIX is Not Revertive only N+1 63 x 2 Mbit/s (P63E1 or P63E1N) protection is Revertive N+1 3x34/45 Mbit/s (P3E3/T3) protection is Revertive N+1 4xSTM-1 ELECTRICAL port (P4ES1N) protection is Revertive
When the configuration of the equipment protection scheme is completed confirm closing the dialog box by clicking on the OK push button. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialog box. 12.4 Switching EPS This functionality enables to force a protecting board to work even if there is not failure. The forced switch will fail if the other board is already forced switched or if the protecting board has a failure condition. In order to switch an EPS, perform the following operations: • •
Select a transmission board in the Equipment view. Select the EPS pull down menu. Then select the Switch.
Figure 117. Switching EPS The following dialogue box is opened.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
150/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 118. EPS Switch dialogue box This dialogue box displays in its left part the EPS of the selected board. From this dialogue box the operator can configure, in the current release, only the Lockout options, by clicking on the relevant radio button. The Manual to command perform the "manual" switch, active only if the other board is not alarmed. Clicking on the OK push button will initiate the switch and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the operation and closes the dialogue box. 12.5 EPS Overview EPS Overview allows displaying as well as search for EPS states. Selecting the EPS Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below. Opens
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
151/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 119. EPS overview To Search the EPS groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering for all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: - Board Type: allows filtering for the EPS protected boards; the following filters values should be offered (examples) • • • • • • • • •
ED
Ignore SYNTH1N MATRIX MATRIXN P3E3/T3 P63E1 P63E1N P4ES1N ATM4X4 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
152/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- Status: allows filtering for all possible EPS protection states; the following values should be offered (examples): • • • • • • • •
Ignore Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be updated (see Figure below.)
Figure 120. EPS overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: -
Protection Group (example protection Groupld, 40)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
153/388
-
Board Id (example r01sr1/board#40)
-
Board Role: • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
-
(Protected) (Protecting)
B Status (board status) • • •
-
Ped Ping
A S F
(Active) (Standby) (Faulty)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit follow • • • • • • •
Normal DNR Auto-Fail Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout
(Do Not Revert) (Auto switch Equipment Fail) (Auto switch Wait Time to Restore) (Manual switch) (Force switch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning: - Green (OK): for protected protection units active - Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active on auto switch or commands - Orange (Major): for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for auto switch or commands - Cyan (Indicative) for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the button of the EPS Overview windows are available five buttons that allows navigating through the EPS management views and subrack view, board view. In this way the operator has a quick link towards the views showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. N.B.
Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row
The buttons available are: - Open Subrack View: opens the Subrack view showing the protection states with icons on the boards (see Figure below.) The possible protection states and the relevant symbols are explained in the following: Symbol EPS protection status No Request Do not Revert Lockout Auto Switch (WTR, Fail) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
154/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Manual Forced
-
Open Board View: opens the board view showing the alarm and the board administrative states
-
Open Commands: opens the EPS Switch dialog box, and the relevant description.
-
EPS Management: opens the EPS Management dialog box, and the relevant description.
-
EPS Parameters: opens the EPS Configuration dialog box, and the relevant description.
Clock on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
155/388
Figure 121. Subrack view after “Open Subrack View” command
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
156/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 122. Board view after “Open Board View” command
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
157/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
13 Multiplex Section Protection Management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
13.1 Architecture types The Multiplex Section Protection in the connection between two NEs protected by cable and port duplication. At the source the signal is duplicated and sent to the sink via two independent cables. When occurs a multiplex section failure, the system switches to the other cable and port. The MS Linear Trail Protection can be applied to any NE where it is possible to configure a linear APS (single ended/dual ended) line protection. For this NE is applicable the APS 1+1 Proprietary, m the APS 1+1 Standard and the APS 1:1 Standard dual ended. The APS 1+1 (not revertive) feature permits a 1+1 protection in a linear link, where a path signal is protected by another dedicated path carrying the same signal. The protection can be set both in single (unidirectional) and in dual (bidirectional) ended mode. In single ended mode (unidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching only the signal affected by the failure. In dual ended mode (bidirectional) the protection is accomplished by switching both the affected and the unaffected signals. Architecture 1+1 or N+1 Standard Described in ITU-T Rec. G783/G841. The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides a k1/k2 communication protocol thus this protection can be single or dual ended. Architecture 1+1 Proprietary (not used) The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. No k1/k2 communication protocol is provided thus this protection can be only single ended. Architecture 1+1 Optimized (not used) Architecture 1 : 1 Standard (not used) Described in ITU-T Rec. G.783/G841 as architecture 1 : n (with n=1). The reference switching criteria are SF and SD. It provides revertive mode managed by k1/k2 protocol and thus this protection can be single or dual ended. The spare interface can be used to transport "low priority traffic". The WTR time is used with revertive mode. Signal Degrade (SD) software setting enables the MSP protection mechanisms when a SD is recognized on the working port. The SD threshold reference values depend on the NE selected threshold on the MS termination point. 13.2 MSP Options Introduction All the MSP options are available starting from the Port View following the step explained below: - Select Equipment from the Views menu - Double click on the SDH optical board to configure to open the port icon - Double click on the port icon to open the port view - Select the MSP block in the port view and then choose the MSP options by clicking on Port -> MSP menu; the possible choice are: ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
158/388
• • • •
MSP Create MSP Management MSP Commands MSP Delete
MSP Create, MSP Management, MSP Commands and MSP Delete can also be accessed from the Transmission-> MSP menu
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
13.3 MSP Create Select the MSP Create option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open the MSP Schema Creation.
Figure 123. MSP Create Option
Figure 124. MSP Schema Creation
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
159/388
In this release two MSP Protection Schemas are supported: -
MSP 1+1 standard
-
MSP N: 1 standard
Select one and then click on Add Port button in the Ports field to create a MSP schema.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure below. Is opened Following steps are necessary: -
Choose Port
-
Select a Port Role (protected or protecting)
-
Define Channel Id (mandatory for MSP N: 1)
-
Define SDH Priority (type of traffic, High or Low)
Figure 125. MSP schema creation Port dialog Select the Choose Port button to define the "Protected Port" and "Protecting Port" units. Figure below is opened
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
160/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 126. TP Search Click on Rack-Subrack and select the Board (Protected/Protecting) on the "Equipment" window (left side). The "termination Points" list (right side) is available. On this right side select the OpS TP of the chosen board and then click on the OK button. It is possible to select the board through the "Board History" button selecting the board list menu. The "Filter Section" is divided into different fields. It permits to visualize a reduced TP Class. If used, OpS class must be selected. The comp lete TP research description is reported in the "Transmission View".
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
161/388
Click on the OK button and repeat the operation for both “Protected Port" and "Protecting Port". If it has been selected a Protected/Protecting port configured in a previously MSP schema protection an error message of access denied will be appear on the screen. In the dialogue of Figure below. Also configure the MSP protection schema with the chosen Protection Schema and enter the related Schema Parameters according the following rules:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
1+1 Standard can be dual-ended or single-ended, No revertive N+1 Standard can be only dual-ended Revertive.
At the end click on the OK button to confirm the MSP protection schema configuration. An error message will be appear if the NE does not support the selected schema
Figure 127. MSP 1+1 standard protection schema (example) 13.4 MSP Management Select the MSP Management option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the MSP Schema Configuration.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
162/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 128. MSP Management Option The MSP Schema Configuration dialog shows the current state of the MSP schema, setting and state (protected or protecting) of the current SDH-n port. This dialog allows setting the configuration parameters for the designated multiplex section: -
Protection Schema reported in the previous paragraph Architecture Types
- Schema Parameters: • • • •
-
Dual Ended / Single Ended protection switch and directionality. Revertive/Non Revertive mode The WTR Time (Wait to Restore) is the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure / defect. Enable Switch on SD is not operative in current release.
Ports area display the current MSP schema: • • • •
Port Id: identify the location of the board Role: identify the role of the board ("Protecting" or "Protected") Channel Id: mandatory for MSP N:1 (max. value is 14) Priority: type of traffic, High or Low
Configure the MSP protection Schema with the chosen protection schema and enter the related schema parameters. At the end click on the OK button to configure the MSP protection schema. An error message will be appear if the selected schema in not supported by the NE.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
163/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 129. MSP Management View 13.4.1 MSP modification The same MSP Management option can be used to modify the schema parameters of an active MSP configuration. Before changing a single ended (unidirectional) schema into a dual ended (bidirectional), all active switches must be cleared (manual switch, lockout,). If the operator wants to change the protection schema architecture or the ports involved in the MSP schema, the current schema must be removed and re-created. 13.5 MSP Delete Select the MSP Delete option from the Port->MSP menu (see Figure below.) to open the "MSP Schema Deletion".
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
164/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 130. MSP Delete option
Figure 131. MSP Schema Deletion Click on "OK" button to delete the selected MSP Schema Configuration 13.6 Display of Protection State The MSP protection state of a port is displayed at the bottom of the Port view. Some examples are reported in Figure below. The following states are always displayed: Port Status - Active (red color) or Standby (orange color). The active protection status is referred to a protected/protecting port (where the traffic is transported): when a failure is detected, the protecting port is ready to save the traffic (and becomes active). The standby protection status is referred to a protecting/protected port that is ready to save the traffic. MSP Group Status, MSP Own Unit and MSP Related Unit - (green color) Displayed if an automatic switch is requested. "Own Unit" stands for the currently displayed unit in the port view; "Related Unit" stands for the related unit of the same protection group. The status indications are: NR: (abbreviation of No Request); normal, idle condition, the traffic is on the main port DNR: (abbreviation of Do Not Revert); the SF or SD has been recovered but the traffic is switched on the spare port PF: a protection failure has been detected on the port RF: a release command has been failed ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
165/388
FOP: a failure of protocol has been detected Complete: = the bridge/switch actions are completed Pending: = the bridge/switch actions are pending The "complete" and "pending" indications precede the following statuses:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
AS: automatic protection switching enabled MS: a manual local protection command has been activated FS: a forced local protection command has been activated LO: a lockout local protection command has been activated SF/SD: Signal Failure or Signal Degraded has been detected WTR: wait time to restore status MSP Request Source - (green color) indicates where the operator commands (force/manual/lockout) have been performed. Only present when a command is operative. - Local: switch due to near end SD/SF or local user switch command - Remote: switch due to received K1/K2 bytes. A remote switch cannot be released locally, but can be overwritten by a switch with higher priority. MSP Protocol Status This parameter indicates the current APS Protocol status. The following values are possible: - OK - Failure (in case of FOP)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
166/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 132. MSP Protection Status Examples Figure up. Represent a MSP configuration with a normal condition, with an automatic protection switching and with a forced command. In any situation are represent the statuses displayed on both protected/protecting Port views. The Active status indication, with a forced command on the protecting group, shows where the forced command is applied. 13.7 MSP Commands Select the MSP Commands option from the Port -> MSP menu (see Figure below) to open the "MSP Command window".
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
167/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 133. MSP Commands option Protecting Port: the location of the board hosting the protecting port is displayed. Protected Port: the location of the board hosting the protected port is displayed. The lockout of protection command denies working channel access to the protection section by issuing a "Lockout" of protection request (on the "Protection Status" of MSP Management). It is possible to "Lockout the Protecting Port" or "Lockout the Protected Port"; to remove the lockout commands select Release Ping (for the protecting) and Release Ped (for the protected). The Force to command switches the working cha nnel (Protected port) to the protection section (Protecting port), unless an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exits on the protection section, by issuing a "Forced" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status " of MSP Management). It is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Forced to" Protected port command. For 1+1 non-revertive system, forced switch no working channel transfer the working channel back from protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since forced switch has higher priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out regardless of the working section condition. The Manual to command switches the working channel (Protection port) to the protection section (Protection port), unless a failure condition exits on the protection section or an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect, by issuing a "Manual" switch request for that port (on the "Protection Status)" of MSP Management). Is also possible to switch back to the working channel using again the "Manual to" Protected port command. For 1+1 non-revertive system, manual switch no working channel transfers the working channel back from protection to working section, unless an equal or higher priority request is in effect. Since manual switch has lower priority than SF or SD on working section, this command will be carried out only if the working section is not in SF or SD condition The Clear WTR command cancels the delay time for switching protection and protecting port after recovery from failure/defect.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
168/388
The Exercise command issues an exercise request for protection channel and checks response on MSP bytes, unless the protection channel is in use. This check controls the k1/k2 communication protocol functionality to be sure that the protocol is right also on the protection section. Not operative in current release.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Release command clears all previously switching commands.
Figure 134. MSP Commands The priority levels for the MSP commands are (from the higher to the lower one)_ Lockout. Force to, Auto-switch (SF&SD), Manual to. Table 1. Gives the priority rules when are occurred two different commands. The first column on the left and the first row at the top report the switch protection and the external MSP commands. The row/column crossing gives the command or protection result (i.e.: if an "Auto-switch" and a "Manual to" command are present, "Auto-switch" is operative. Table 1. MSP commands and Auto-switch protection priority Lockout of Forced to Auto--switch Manual to Protection Lockout of Protection Forced to Auto--switch Manual to
______________
Lockout
Lockout
Lockout
Lockout Lockout Lockout
______________
Forced
Forced Forced
______________
Forced Auto--switch
Auto--switch
______________
13.8 MSP overview MSP Overview allows displaying as well as search for MSP states. Selecting the MSP Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu Figure below opens
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
169/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 135. MSP overview To Search the MSP groups two different ways of filtering are supported; a filtering foe all protection units located on a dedicated Board Type as well as a filtering for protection units’ carrying a specific Status. The search criteria can be chosen with the help of a combo box: - Board Type: allows filtering for the MSP protected boards; the following filters values should be offered (example): • • • • • • •
ED
Ignore P4ES1N P4S1N P4E4N P4S4N P16S1N S-41N 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
170/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
L-41N L-42N S-161 S-161N S-161ND L-161 L-161N L-161ND L-162 L-162N L-162ND MATRIX MATRIXN
- Status: allows to filter for all possible EPS protection states; the following filters values should be offered (example): • • • • • • • • • • •
Ignore NR (Normal) DNR Auto-SF Auto-SD Auto-WTR Manual Force Lockout APS Invalid (Fail) Bad channel (Fail)
After the filter selection click on Search button to start; the field below the Search button will be update (see Figure below.)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
171/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 136. MSP overview after Search (Example) Each protection unit is presented with the following information: -
Protection Group (example protection Groupld, 137)
-
Port Id (example r01sr1sl33/port#02-OpS)
-
Role: • •
-
Protected Protecting
Status (board status): • • • •
-
Ped Ping
A S F ET
(Active) (Standby) (Faulty) Extra Traffic (Not operative)
Protection Status: defines the current state of the protection unit as follow ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
172/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • • • • • • • •
NR (Normal) DNR (Do Not Revert) Auto-SF (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-SD (AutoSwitch Signal Degrade) Auto-WTR (AutoSwitch Wait Time To Restore) Manual (Manual Switch) Force Lockout APS Invalid (Protection fail condition APS invalid) Bad channel (Protection fail condition Channel Mismatch)
The colors used for each row have the following meaning: - Green (OK): for protected protection units active - Red (Critical): for protected protection units in fail condition, protection unit in lockout or active on autoswitch on commands - Orange (Major) for protected units in standby after a command and protecting protection unit in standby for autoswitch or commands - Cyan (Indicative: for protecting protection unit active and no fail condition present in the schema (Do Not Revert State) At the bottom of the MSP Overview windows are available five buttons that allows to navigate through the MSP management views and to open the Port View. By clicking on Open Port View the operator has a quick link towards the view showing the correlation between the alarms and the protection states. N.B. Before to click on one of the five buttons select a row The buttons available are: - Open Port view: opens the port view showing the correlation between the alarm and the MSP protection states. (See Figure below) - MSP Create: opens the MSP Create dialog box. - MSP Delete: opens the MSP Delete dialog box - MSP Management: opens the MSP Management dialog box - MSP Commands: opens the MSP Commands dialog box Click on Close button to exit from the EPS Overview window
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
173/388
Figure 137. Port view after “Open Port View”commands
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
174/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14 Transmission View
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14.1 Overview This section describes the operations necessary for the consultation, modification and configuration of TPs, providing a representation of the entire signal flow. The generic Transmission View, described in this chapter, offers the possibility of displaying a single TP or a set of all kinds of TPs (or collected functionality which is represented by one/several TPs). To display the termination points in the Transmission View, either select specific TPs from a TP search dialog or access the view directly from another view, e.g. by navigating from the Port View. The Transmission View provides the following features: •
Brief overview regarding transmission resources. o An overview concerning all TPs belonging to a port can be called in by activating the function to expand the selected TP. TP names are listed in an additional information area if the mouse pointer is positioned over it. The following states are indicated: - The alarm synthe sis icon indicates the alarm state - A cross indicates the cross-connection state - A circle indicates whether a TP can be structured - Whether a TP is under Performance Monitoring indicated by a blue "P" letter - Whether a TP is involved in a loop action, an arrow indicates it
•
An overview concerning signal flow can be requested by a user action. The user can select a TP and apply the action Show Cross-connected TPs . The result is that the objects related to the TP are displayed and lines indicate the connections. Expanding and hiding TPs that are related to the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU-12 CTP) enables all related TPs to be added to the view, thus providing a representation of the entire signal flow.
•
Display of single or multiple termination points. o Search for and select a termination point in a TP search dialog and display it in the Transmission View. o Pop-up the Transmission View from the board view. All TPs/compound TPs associated with the physical port are displayed (i.e. TPs down to AU-4). Provide the functionality to create/show cross-connections. Provide the functionality to create/show Multiplex Section Protection (Not operative in the current release) Provide the functionality to create/show Loopback commands. Provide the possibility of configuring a selected TP. Calling the configuration dialogs of the common Transmission/Port Views category accesses this functionality.
• • • •
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
175/388
• •
Provide the possibility of showing a detailed view of a TP with alarms, navigating to the Port view. Provide the possibility of showing and setting Performance Monitoring parameters and data.
14.2 View elements
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Transmission View uses the symbols illustrated in Figure below.
Figure 138. Symbols Used in Transmission View 14.3 View Layout The Transmission View is a main view. It provides views of specific areas, which display the transmission resources, and the specific Transmission View pull down menu, which provides the Transmission View operations. 14.3.1 View Description Figure below. Illustrates the Transmission View area. TPs that are received from the network element are displayed in the Transmission View with the respective TP and connection symbols described in The number of TPs presented initially depends on whether the Transmission View is popped up from a board view, whether a TP has been selected in another view or whether it is called without a selected TP.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
176/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
When the "Transmission view" is reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu in its initial state contains no objects.
Figure 139. Transmission View Area 14.3.2 Number of TPs Displayed in Transmission View It is possible both to expand a VC-4, thus displaying all underlying TPs, and to hide TPs, which are of no interest. The objects initially displayed depend on the situation/definition. 14.3.3 Naming TPs The following rules are applied in order to identify the TPs displayed: ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
177/388
• •
The root node contains the full user label, All child nodes contain a short label indicating the position inside the tree.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14.3.4 Dynamic View Behaviour The following section describes the view states and provides a short description of events that affect the view. Initial state of the view In its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. Objects can be searched for and displayed using the Add TP dialog. Working state of the view In its working state, the Transmission View already contains objects. If the operator searches for and displays a TP using the TP Search dialog, the view is first initialized again and then the TP is displayed. The same applies in the case of navigation from another view to the Transmission View - the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. Navigation to Transmission View from other views If the Transmission View is popped up from the Port View, only the selected TP is displayed. Alarm notification The alarm synthesis icons of the TP objects indicate alarms concerning the TPs displayed graphically. The TP objects are updated accordingly. Object deletion The TP objects indicate all kinds of object deletion events related to TPs displayed. The graphical objects are removed accordingly from the Transmission View. Example: modification of the payload structure from 63 TU-12 to 3 TU-3. 14.4 Transmission view access and menu The "Transmission view" can be reached selecting the Transmission option in the View pull down menu. In this case, in its initial state, the Transmission View contains no objects. In the case of navigation from another view (example the "Port view") to the Transmission View, the Transmission View is always initialized and the corresponding objects are then displayed in it. Selecting the "Transmission" option in the menu bar the complete pull down Transmission menu is presented The following menu items are available: • • • • • • • • •
ED
Add TP Expand Hide selected TP. TP Configuration TP Frame Mode Configuration management TP Threshold Configuration Terminate TP Disterminate TP AU4 Concatenation
01
Select the TP to show on the Transmission view. Display TPs that are related to the selected TP. Hide TPs that are related to the selected TP or the Set parameters for the Overhead on Synchronous TP's. Set parameters for 2Mbit/s G.703/G.704 or ISDN-PRA Set B2 ExBER and Degraded Signal parameters. Terminate a path on a AU-4 CTP Disterminate a path on a AU-4 CTP
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
178/388
• • • • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
• •
Cross-Connection Manage the connection of the paths. Monitoring Operations Create, configure and delete POM/SUT and TC TP's. Performance Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data. Structure TPs Provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring selected TP Loopback Manage the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes Physical Media Manage the physical TP setting. MSP Manage the Multiplex Section Protection of the NE. Not available for PDH port. See MSP Management. In this paragraph is not described the MSP>NE MSP synthesis option of the Transmission menu, not used in this NE. Show Supported Board Navigate to the upper board level. Navigate t o Port View Permit to show the detailed alarm of the TP.
These options are described in next paragraphs except the previously referenced.
Figure 140. Transmission menu options 14.5 Add TP Select the Transmission -> Add TP option. This menu item opens the TP Search dialog. The TP Search dialog enables the user to search for and add a TP to the Transmission View (e.g. search for all TPs on a board with PM enabled). 14.5.1 TP Search Default Mode In this mode, the dialog displays the structure of the equipment tree. After double-clicking, e.g. on a port, the contents of the port appear on the right-hand side of the dialog (TP list). To keep the
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
179/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
number of items displayed small, they are displayed in a hierarchical order. Double-click again to recall the next level
Figure 141. TP Search Dialog, Initial State After double-clicking on an object, an Information window appears (see). The message text corresponds to the object selected.
Figure 142. Information Window
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
180/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
It is possible to select several individual TPs from the TP list by clicking on them while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard. To select a block of TPs, click on the first TP and then click on the last TP in the block while holding down the Shift key on the keyboard. But only the first TP selected in the list will be shown in the Transmission View.
Figure 143. TP Search Dialog with Various TP Selections After clicking on Show CC State, a more detailed TP list is displayed containing TP cross connection status information.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
181/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 144. TP Search Dialog with Status Information Displayed The symbols in the TP list have the following significance:
Figure 145. Symbols in TP Search The background color of the symbols represents the status of the TP: • •
Grey = inactive Green = active
An easy way to recall to previously displayed boards is to use Board History. Select the relevant board from the list.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
182/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 146. Board History Check List Search Mode Use Search Mode together with the filtering options provided below the TP list. The following options are available: •
Class: Ignore, E1S, OpS, PPI, AU-4, VC-4, AU-4+VC-4, TU-3, TU-3+VC-3, TU2, TU-12, VC-12, TU-12+VC12, AUX, MS, RS, OGP, GMAU.
•
Connection State (Current connectivity status): Ignore, not connected, connected
•
Alarm State (Path Trace): Ignore, critical, major, minor, warning, not alarmed
•
Assign State: Ignore, NML, EML
•
Perf. Monitoring (Performance Monitoring condition): Ignore, enabled
• • • •
TTI expect: not used TTI receive: not used TTI transmit: not used Location: Permits to insert the location of the TP in the following format: rsrsl
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
183/388
Name: not supported
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Figure 147. TP Search Dialog with Different Filtering Options After activating the search process with the Search TP button, the following dialog box appears. Clicking on Cancel can interrupt the search.
Figure 148. “Information...”Dialog for Search Process
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
184/388
N.B. When searching for PM-enabled TPs on NE, Rack or Subrack, the time for the request can be very high. It is recommended to search for PM-enabled TPs at the board level (a board is selected for the search). Common Buttons The following buttons are available in all modes:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Ok Closes the dialog and opens the Transmission View containing the selected TP. Close Closes the dialog without updating the Transmission View. Print This command is used to generate and print a list of TPs according to the current filter selection. The command opens the following dialog:
Figure 149. Print to Printer Select the desired printer from the list box and click on Ok to start the print job or abort with Cancel. The dialog changes after clicking on File :
Figure 150. Print to File
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
185/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Enter the name of the output file in the input field or select a file name from the File Select dialog by clicking on Select file. Select if the output format should be Postscript or ASCII. The output file is generated after clicking on Ok. Use Cancel to stop the process.
Figure 151. Example Printout Help This command opens the online help for the TP-Search dialog. 14.6 TP Configuration Select the Transmission -> TP Configuration option. TP Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. 14.6.1 High Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected, a dialog appears for the configuration of the main parameters of the objects. Example: • • •
VC-4 TTP (140 Mbit/s PDH) VC-3 TTP (34 and 45 Mbit/s PDH) Mod VC-4 TTP (matrix resource)
The main parameters are:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
186/388
• •
C2 Signal Label: "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific". J1 Path Trace.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The dialogs of the following figure appears:
Figure 152. High Order TP Configuration 14.6.1.1 J1 Path Trace Operative only on VC-4 in current release. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by NE. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal). Received fields are read only. With the relevant button the operator can set the Expected field as:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
187/388
- TTI Enable - TTI Disable - TTI Repeated The Transmitted field can be set with TTI Enable or TTI Repeated byte
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Empty TTI button permits to send an all zeroes path trace. To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the following table
TP Significant Byte
Table 2. Default value for C2/V5 Signal Label VC-4 TTP / AU4 CTP VC-4 TTP VC3-TTP (SDH) (PDH) C2 C2 C2
Default value
2
18
4
VC-12 TTP V5 2
Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field.
Figure 153. J1 hexadecimal editor (example) 14.6.1.2 C2 Signal Label Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the C2 Signal Label: • •
ED
0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
188/388
• • • • • • •
2: TUG structure 3: Locked TU-n 4: Asynchronous 34/45Mbyte 18: Asynchronous 140Mbyte 19: ATM 20: MAN, DQDB 21: FDDI.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • •
Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
14.6.2 J0 Section Trace management Select RST block and then select Port -> TP Configuration The fields of the following figure appears:
Figure 154. J0 Configuration This function is implemented in order to manage the J0 Trace configuration. This dialog shows the current values for received, expected and transmitted trail trace and it allows the operator to change only the values of expected and transmitted trail trace. The received trail trace is read-only. Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or disable TTI Monitoring.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
189/388
Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field. 14.6.3 Low Order TP Configuration Depending on the TP selected, a dialog to configure the main parameters of the following objects: •
VC-12 TTP.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The main parameters are: • •
V5 Signal Label. "Automatic" (decided by the NE) or "Equipped not specific". J2 Path Trace. Not operative in current release.
The following dialogs appears:
Figure 155. Low Order TP Configuration Click on Hex button will be opened displaying in hexadecimal code the same value reported in Transmitted and received field.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
190/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 156. J2 hexadecimal editor 14.6.3.1 J2 Path Trace Not operative in current release. If the Path Trace is 16 bytes long, the first byte is a CRC7 checksum calculated by the NE. If the Path Trace is shorter than 16 bytes, it is filled with zero bytes ("0" hexadecimal). Expected and Transmitted fields are editable by the operator. Mode1 enable the 16 bytes long sequence for Path trace One repeated byte allows setting one byte that will be repeated Received fields are read only. With the relevant button it is possible to enable or Disable TTI Monitoring. Empty TTI send an all zeroes path trace. 14.6.3.2 V5 Signal Label Received, Expected and Transmitted fields are read only. They can display the following number, according the G.707 recommendations for the V5 Signal Label: • • • • •
0: Unequipped 1: Equipped non-specific 2: Asynchronous 3: Bit Synchronous 4: Byte Synchronous
In the Transmitted field it is possible to select the values: • •
Automatic: the NE according the VC structure automatically selects the C2 Signal Label value. Equipped not specific (it corresponds to number 1)
To replace modified with the default, enter the default manually according to the value reported in Table 2.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
191/388
14.7 TP Frame Mode Configuration This command is available for: - P12
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the Transmission -> TP Frame Mode Configuration option TP Frame Mode Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" and "Synchronization" view menu. This menu item enables the configuration of the most important transmission parameters concerning the Primary Rate Access and G.703/G.704 frame management. The following dialog appears:
Figure 157. TP Frame Mode Configuration The windows contains the following graphical objects: - "Framed Signal Mode" that allows to configure the attribute framed Signal Mode; the user can choose one of the following value: • •
ED
"Not Framed" (G.703 interface): the PRA function cannot be activate; "Framed without PRA" (G.704): the behavior according to ETS 300-233 is applied in the handling of bits of Time Slot 0 in terms of state, defect detection and consequent action; 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
192/388
• •
"Framed with PRA" : PRA function are activated "Framed with leased line PRA" a proprietary leased line behavior is a applied.
- "CRC4 Mode" that defines the monitoring capabilities applied to the signal with a CRC multiframe:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
-
"Enabling" : enable or disable the CRC-4 error counting "Remote Indication" : red-only field that indicates if status of CRC-4 error counting functionality of far-end NE is enabled or disabled
"Frame Status" that reports an indication of the received signal: • •
"No indication" "The 2Mb/s signal is multi- frame"
Press OK to apply the parameters or Cancel to close the dialog 14.8 TP Threshold Configuration This menu allows the operator to set the alarm thresholds for MST and VCi layer. Select the MST or the VCi block Select the Transmission -> TP Threshold Configuration option. Figure below. Will be opened. The user can select one of the two different Defect distributions: - Poisson distribution enable configuration of the Excessive Bit Error Ratio (ExBER on MST, VCi) threshold and of the Signal Degrade (SD on MST, VC) threshold of the TP's related counted primitives. - Burst distribution enable configuration of the maximum number of error frames and the total a amount of bad block per frame. - ExBER - Threshold: 10-3 to 10-5 Enable Consequent Actions: fixed to enables - Signal Degrade - Threshold: 10-5 to 10-9 - Burst Parameters - Threshold: 1 or 10 or 100 or 1000 - Burst Parameters - Consecutive Bad Seconds: 2 to 10
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
193/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 158. Degraded Signal Threshold selection Click on OK to confirm the chosen parameters. 14.9 Terminate/Disterminate TP Select the Transmission -> Terminate TP or Disterminate TP option. Only one command in the menu is available, depending on whether a TP is terminated or not. 14.9.1 Terminate TP Use this action to terminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. A cross-connection between the selected AU-4 CTP (= aTP) and a modifiable VC-4 TTP (= bTP) is created. Three TUG-3 and TU-3 are created if the modifiable VC-4 TTP was not already structured. A cross appears in the icon of the terminated TP:
If the TP is already cross-connected a error message appears.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
194/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14.9.2 Disterminate TP Use this action to disterminate a path. It can be performed on a AU-4 CTP. The related crossconnection is deleted. NOTE: the “Disterminate”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying signals, such as: •Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs •POM / HPOM operations •Lower order Connections •Higher order Connections •Lower/Higher order Path Terminations •Loop–backs on lower TPs Thus the deletion of every operation/connection/termination is necessary, in the same order as above listed, before disterminating a TP. A box message will be presented, in order to confirm the TP distermination . 14.10 Monitoring Operations Select the Transmission -> Monitoring Operations option as for the following figure. Creation/Deletion and Configuration options are present.
Monitoring Operations can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu. The commands of this menu item are for the management of the POM/SUT /TC (Path Overhead Monitoring, Supervised Unequipped Termination and Tandem Connection). This command is available for: • • •
ED
AU-4 CTP TU-3 CTP TU-12 CTP 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
195/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
14.10.1Creation/Deletion The dialog allows multiple object creation/deletion. The dialog shown in the following Figure below opens
Figure 159. Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion The Path Overhead Monitoring has the following parameters: • •
Before Matrix (available only on AU-4 CTP) After Matrix
The Supervisory Unequipped Termination, not operative in current release, has the following parameters: • • • •
Sink (before matrix) Sink (after matrix) Source Bidirectional
The Tandem Connection has the following configurable parameters: •
•
Tandem Connections Monitoring (TCM): -
TCM Before Matrix
-
TCM After Matrix
Tandem Connection Termination (TCT): -
ED
TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
196/388
-
TCT Bidirectional After Matrix
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Press Ok to apply the parameters or Close to close the dialog and discard the not with Ok applied changes. When select and apply the Path Overhead Monitoring, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner:
Figure 160. Display of POM and TCM in Port View (example) When select and apply the Tandem Connection Monitoring / Tandem Connection Termination, the changes will be displayed in the Port View in the following manner:
Figure 161. Display of POM and TCM/TCT in Port View (example) 14.10.2Configuration Depending on the parameters selected in the Monitoring Operations Creation/Deletion dialog, not all sections of the dialog are available. N.B. It is possible to open the POM and TCT/TCM Configuration dialog for a CTP even if neither Path Overhead Monitor nor Tandem Connection was created before (SUT isn't available in this release). No changes can be made in this case and the values displayed can be ignored.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
197/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 162. Monitor Configuration TTI Definition The TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) has a maximum length of 16 characters. The following TTI Definitions are available: • • •
TTI Expected TTI Received without the display TTI Sent
The following TTI Types are available: • • •
TTI Enabled TTI Disabled TTI Repeated Byte
Error Distribution Poisson and Burst error distribution are supported TCM/TCT Cons Actions It is needed to support explicit consequent action activation (AIS insertion) for TCT sink and bidirectional. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
198/388
Thresholds Set the thresholds of the following parameters: •
Signal Degrade Poisson mode only: from 10-5 to 10-9 .
•
Excessive Error
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Poisson mode only: from 10-3 also if presented a selection from 10-3 to 10-5 •
Burst Degrade Select a value between 1 and 1000 errors/sec for the Burst Degrade threshold.
•
Burst Consecutive
Select a value between 2 and 10 sec for the Burst Degrade Consecutive. Alarm Timing Rising and Clearing Timing are not supported by OMSN. Unequipped Trail Not available 14.11 Structure TPs Select the Transmission -> Structure TPs option.
This menu item provides the possibility of structuring and destructuring a selected TP. The level that is selected defines how the signal is to be structured, e.g. if a VC-4 TTP is selected and the menu item TU-12 is chosen, the signal is structured down to 63 TU-12 CTPs. The following menu items represent all those possible:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
199/388
• • • • •
TU-2. Not supported. TU-3. TU-12. VC-3/VC-4. Not supported. VC-12. Not supported.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The following items are available for synchronous TPs: • • •
Modifiable VC-4 TTP: TU-3, TU-12 TUG-3: TU-3, TU-12 TUG-2: TU-12.
14.12 Loopback The commands of this menu item are for the management of the loopback commands, for commissioning or maintenance purposes. 14.12.1Loopback Configuration The loopbacks can be applied at line (external to equipment) level or at internal equipment level. The loopback commands are used to separate the communication network into independent part checking the line/equipment functionality during the network installation or maintenance operation. The loopback architecture provides four configurations. Line Loopback And Continue Line Loopback And AIS Internal Loopback And Continue Internal Loopback and AIS
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
200/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 163. Loopback configurations Select a TP that supports the Loopback Configuration Loopbacks act on the following TPs: •
PDH board (only from the Port View): - Line loopback performed on: •
P for 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s PPI
- Internal loopback performed on: • • • •
ED
P12 for 2Mbit/s CTP P31 for 34/45Mbit/s CTP P4 for 140Mbit/s CTP
SDH board:
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
201/388
The loopback configuration can be done only on SDH ports with the acronym ending with a "N" letter (i.e. P4S1N, S-4.1N, L-4.1N, L-4.2N, etc.) - Line loopback performed on: • •
EIS for electrical STM-1 SPI OpS for optical STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 SPI
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- Internal loopback performed on: •
MsT TTP for STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 ports
Select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Port Loopback Configuration option. Port Loopback Configuration can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu.
Figure below. Opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
202/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 164. Port Loopbacks View Choose the TP clicking on the "Choose TP" button. Select the TP where to apply the loopback command. For this NE the "Timed Loopbacks" field is not managed and thus Start/Stop loopbacks time is not editable. 14.12.2Loopback Management To manage the loopback configuration select the Transmission -> Loopback -> Loopback Management option.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
203/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Loopback Management can also be accessed from the "Port" view menu and from the "Configuration menu Figure below. Opens.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
204/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 165. Loopback Management The configured loopback are listed into the current loopbacks table. This table can be managed by the "Search" criteria, "Delete" and "Create" commands. •
• •
Search Criteria (operative): to configure the filter select the "Loop and Continue" type (Yes= Loop And Continue, No= Loop And AIS) then select the "Directionality" Internal or Line and edit the Initial TP Id (write: rack, subrack, board, port# and the TP type: EIS (SPI/PPI Electrical), OpS (SPI/PPI Optical), MST and so on. For "Initial TP" has to be intended the outgoing signal while for "Destination TP" the incoming signal. Enable the filter through the "Toggle Filter" Enable/Disable button. Click on the "Search" button to start the configured loopback research into the current loopback table. The "Delete" command permits to delete a loopback listed in the Current loopbacks Table: select a loopback in the list and click on the "Delete" button. The "Create" command permits to create a new loopback configuration: clicking on "Create" the previous figure opens. Follow the previously paragraph indications to create a new loopback configuration.
The activated loopbacks are signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
205/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 166. Loopback Port View
Figure 167. Loopback Transmission View 14.13 Physical Media Select the Transmission -> Physical Media option.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
206/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The Physical Media options permit to set physical configuration of each TP. It opens a menu in which the various options will be available according the TP's type (for the option common with the "Port view" reference is made to the relevant paragraph): - ALS Management. - Show Optical Configuration. - TX Quality Configuration. - Single Fiber Configuration. - Extra traffic Not operative - Regeneration Section management Not operative - Line Length Configuration. - Set Domain. - HDSL Configuration Not operative - NT Configuration Not operative - X21 Configuration Not operative 14.13.1Set Domain This option is referred to the Security management and allows the user to set the Manager list and the Access Control Domain of the selected TP. Select the block: EIS for Electrical SDH port, OpS for Optical SDH port, P (PPI) for PDH port. Select the Set Domain option from the Physical Media cascade menu to present the following view: The dialog-box contains the following fields: •
ED
NML Assignment: each connected manager to the TP is highlighted in the list. The user can set a manager clicking on the denomination.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
207/388
Several managers can be enabled contemporaneously, having in charge the TP. The Manager List contains the list of managers ( i.e. RM, SY, NPOS , EML) that work on the NE. The EML-USM administrator (SH or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Resource domain field allow selecting the domain among that displayed in the list, assigning it to the TP.
The different domains could be assigned to different operators. OK button is used to validate the selection. Cancel button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 168. Set Domain 14.14 Navigation Commands 14.14.1Expand Select the Transmission -> Expand option.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
208/388
This menu item provides the possibility of displaying TPs that are related to the selected TP. These may be TPs that are contained by the TP or TPs, which belong to the physical port that is actually connected to the TP.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • •
Show next level of lower TPs, Show all lower TPs, Show next level of upper TPs, Show all upper TPs.
14.14.2Hide Select the Transmission -> Hide option.
This menu item provides the possibility of hiding all upper/lower TPs of a selected TP and the deletion of a selected TP. • • •
Lower TPs, Upper TPs, Selected TPs.
14.14.3Show Supported Board Select the Transmission -> Show Supported Board option. This menu provides the possibility of navigating directly to the board that supports the TP. The Board View appears.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
209/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 169. Board View 14.14.4Navigate to Port View Select the Transmission -> Navigate to Port View option. This menu provides the possibility of navigating to the corresponding Port View related to the selected TP in order to access a detailed overview of alarms quickly. The Port View appears.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
210/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 170. Port View 14.14.5Navigate to HOA Port After selected a structured VC or TU, then click on Transmission –> Navigate to Port View option. The HOA port displays the internal structure of the payload, as for the following figure:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
211/388
Figure 171. Navigate to HOA Port
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
212/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
15 Cross-Connection Management 15.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
15.1.1 Overview The purpose of this domain is to manage the connection of the high and low level path. The following chapters provide the user with information concerning operations on crossconnections: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
"Multiplex Structures for SDH" gives an overview on the SDH technology "Definition of Termination Points" gives an overview about the termination points implemented on the NE "Cross-Connection Types" provides information concerning cross-connection types supported by the NE "Cross-Connection Protection" provides information concerning cross-connection protection supported by the NE "Operative sequence to execute Cross-Connections" details the complete procedure to realize cross-connection "Cross-Connections Management" details the contents of the main cross-connections view "Create/Modify Cross-Connections" describes the creation and modification of crossconnections "Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections" describes the activation, deactivation and deletion of cross-connections. Activation and deactivation not supported in current release. "Split and Join Cross-Connections" describes how to split or join bidirectional crossconnections. Not supported in current release. "Protection Switching" deals with switching actions (force, manual, lockout protection) on cross-connections "Print" deals with printing out list entries on printers or into files "Port Switch Over" not operative. "Show Cross-Connected TPs" describes the possibility of showing connections between two or more TPs of different hierarchies, e.g. connection between au4 and vc4.
15.1.2 Multiplex Structures for SDH By introducing the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), a standardized transmission has been created, matching the European with the American standard. The SDH signal structure contains an extended overhead as well as a fixed pointer controlled assignment of the user signal elements, thus improving the possibilities of the network management. Synchronous multiplexers into Virtual Containers (VC) pack signals of the Synchronous and Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH). The STM-1 signal structure is achieved by using the multiplex structure complying with ITU-T and ETSI. Each of the user channels (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s) is packed into a container synchronous to the STM-1 frame according to a predefined structure. To adjust the plesiochronous signals to the synchronous network clock, certain filling algorithms are available. Fix fill bits are inserted into synchronous signals. A byte column (9 Byte) as Path Overhead (POH) is added to the Container (C) generated. Path Overhead and Container together form the Virtual Container (VC). With the pointer pointing to the start of the VC, in respect of the STM-1 frame, an Administrative Unit (AU) or - if several Containers of a group are to be combined - a Tributary Unit (TU) is generated. Several TUs form a Tributary Unit Group (TUG) and TUGs ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
213/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
again can be combined into a VC. The AU of the signal, together with the Section Overhead (SOH), finally makes up the STM-1 frame.
Figure 172. SDH Multiplex Structure according to ITU-T G.709 The STM-1 frame consists of: • • •
ED
A Section Overhead (SOH) An AU Pointer area A payload area
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
214/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 173. Frame Construction within the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The STM-1 frame has a basic bit rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. A single user channel is packed into a Virtual Container. These Virtual Containers are of different size and may be nested or packed differently. Virtual Containers for the European bit rates: • • • •
The STM-1 frame contains a VC-4, A VC-4 may contain one C-4 or three TUG-3, Each TUG-3 may contain one VC-3 or seven TUG-2, Each TUG-2 contains three VC-12 or one VC-2.
An STM-1 user signal can be constructed of: • • • • • • • • • •
ED
Either 1 x VC-4 Or 3 x VC-3 Or 2 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 Or 2 x VC-3 + 21 x VC-12 Or 1 x VC-3 + 14 x VC-2 Or 1 x VC-3 + 7 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 21 x VC-2 Or 14 x VC-2 + 21 x VC-12 Or 7 x VC-2 + 42 x VC-12 Or 63 x VC-12.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
215/388
STM-N signals are constructed by integer multiples of the basic signal STM-1 of 155.520 Mbit/s. For example an STM-16 signal of 2.488.320 Mbit/s is generated by combining sixteen STM-1 signals byte interleaved.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
15.1.3 Definition of Termination Points (TP) When ports are depicted on the user interface, the following abbreviations are used. This section concerns the multiplex structure as well as on the information model of object-oriented programming which was used when forming the user interface. As a rule, a Termination Point (TP) is the starting and terminating point of a transmission segment. A distinction is made between the following types of TPs: •
CTP (Connection Termination Point) The CTP represents the termination of a connection. The transmission signal is "terminated", i.e., the received signal is monitored and the error signaling evaluated, while own-code signaling is inserted in the transmitted signal.
•
TTP (Trail Termination Point)
The TTP represents the termination of a transmission segment. The signal is monitored and passed on after modification in one form or another. Both TP types exist on the SDH level and the PDH level. •
CTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: •
AU4 (au4 Connection Termination Point)
The AU-4CTP represents both the creation and termination of an STM-1 connection. The High-order Connection Supervision (HCS) function is included. •
TU-x (Connection Termination Point), e.g. TU-12CTP, TU-2CTP, TU-3CTP
The TU- x CTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-x connection. The Low-order Connection Supervision (LCS) function is included. •
CTPs on PDH level On PDH level a distinction is made between the following CTPs: •
E4 (Connection Termination Point)
The E4-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of incoming 140 Mbit/s PPI •
S4 (Connection Termination Point)
The S4-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of outgoing 140 Mbit/s PPI
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
216/388
•
E32 (Connection Termination Point)
The E32-CTP represents represent the non- intrusive monitoring of incoming 45 Mbit/s PPI •
S32 (Connection Termination Point)
The S32-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of outgoing 45 Mbit/s PPI
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
E31 (Connection Termination Point)
The E31-CTP represents represent the non- intrusive monitoring of incoming 34 Mbit/s PPI •
S31 (Connection Termination Point)
The S31-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of outgoing 34 Mbit/s PPI •
E1 (Connection Termination Point)
The E1-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI. The Mon. (monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. •
S1 (Connection Termination Point)
The S1-CTP represents the non- intrusive monitoring of outgoing 2 Mbit/s PPI. The Mon. (Monitoring) label indicates that is possible to enable the CRC4 control signal. •
TTPs on SDH level On SDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: •
ES (Electrical Section TTP)
An ESTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with electrical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). •
OS (Optical Section TTP)
An OSTTP displays the physical characteristics of a port with optical access (level and code monitoring and conversion). •
RST (Regenerator Section TTP)
An RSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an RSOH (Regenerator Section Overhead), i.e., rows 1 to 3 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. •
ED
MST (Multiplexer Section TTP)
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
217/388
An MSTTP displays the creation and/or termination of an MSOH (Multiplexer Section Overhead), i.e., rows 5 to 9 of the first 9xN columns of an STM-N frame. •
VC-4 (Trail Termination Point)
A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. •
TTPs on PDH level
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
On PDH level a distinction is made between the following TTPs: •
PPI (Trail Termination Point)
On the PDH side, an PPITTP corresponds to the ESTTP of the synchronous side. Depending on the type, it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s, a 45 Mbit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. •
P (pPI Trail Termination Point)
On the PDH side, a pPITTP corresponds to the esTTP of the synchronous side. Depending on the type, it can either display the characteristics of a 140 Mbit/s, a 45MBit/s, a 34 Mbit/s or a 2 Mbit/s port. •
E4 (Trail Termination Point)
The E4-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 140 Mbit/s connection. •
E3 (Trail Termination Point)
The E3-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 34 Mbit/s connection. •
E2 (Trail Termination Point)
The E2-TTP represents the creation and/or termination of a 8 Mbit/s connection. •
VC-4 (Trail Termination Point)
A VC-4 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-4 path. •
VC-3 (Trail Termination Point)
A VC-3 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-3 path. •
VC-12 (Trail Termination Point)
A VC-12 TTP represents both the creation and termination of a VC-12 path. - MSP definition
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
218/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Transmit side, the MSNP (AU4-CTP) input enters two different MSNP/MSN (unprotected CTP) sources and then the MSN-TTP working and protection sources (to insert the K1-K2 bytes) are sent to the own SPI interfaces. Receive side; the working and protection MSN/MSNP outputs (AU4CTP) enter in the switching selector. The MSNP-TTP terminates the selected signal and checks the SSF and the MSP protocol failure.
Figure 174. SDH Transport Level Diagram
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
219/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 175. PDH Transport Level Diagram 15.1.4 Mapping Tables: TP Names The TP names on the 1662SMC reflect the software model the user interface is based on. Therefore they differ from the TP names given in the ITU-T recommendations. The following tables list the TP names mapping conventions in the "Transmission" View. Table 3. PDH TPs ITU-T TP names on 1662SMC PPITTP P E4 CTP eCTP S4 CTP p4 E31 CTP eCTP S31 CTP p31 E32 CTP eCTP S32 CTP p32 E1 CTP eCTP S1 CTP p12Mon E4 TTP not supported E3 TTP not supported E2 TTP not supported VC-4 TTP Vc4 VC-3 TTP Vc3 VC-12 TTP Vc12 ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
220/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Table 4. SDH TPs ITU-T ESTTP OSTTP RSTTP MSTTP MSP AU-4 CTP AU-4-4c CTP VC-4 TTP TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-3 CTP TU-2 CTP TU-12 CTP
TP names on 1662SMC ElS OpS RST MST MSP Au4/Au4P Au4P-4c Vc4 Tug3 Tug2 Tu3 Tu2 Tu12
15.1.5 Cross-Connection Types A cross-connection represents the logical connection between the input and output of the matrix, called the matrix port. The matrix only receives and transmits signals in GTI format. The Generic Transport Interface GTI, Alcatel's standardized signal format for internal interfaces, is similar to the STM-1 format. The incoming signals are mapped or converted to GTI format on the plesiochronous and synchronous I/O boards. This frame is based on the STM-1 frame specified by ITU-T Recommendation G.707. It enables the transport of all signals in the US hierarchy and ETSI hierarchy levels 1 to 4 (1.5 Mbit/s to 140 Mbit/s) mapped to Virtual Containers (VCs). The VCs are sent from the I/O boards to both copies of the Matrix (A and B) via the GTI. The matrix performs the cross-connection on the VC-4, VC-3, VC-2 or VC-12 level and transfers the VCs to the relevant I/O boards via GTI. The configuration of both matrix copies is always identical. On the I/O boards, one GTI signal is selected from Copy A or Copy B, based on quality. The NE supports unidirectional, bidirectional and broadcast connections unprotected as well as protected. 15.1.5.1 Unidirectional Connection Information is transmitted exclusively from the input port to the output port (point-to-point); there is no routing in reverse direction.
Figure 176. Unidirectional Connection 15.1.5.2 Bidirectional Connection Information is transmitted between input port and output port in both directions (point-to-point).
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
221/388
Figure 177. Bidirectional Connection
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
15.1.5.3 Broadcast Connection (Multi-leg / Multipoint) In contrast to a cross-connection between just two points (point-to-point), one source and one sink, a broadcast connection consist of one source and several sinks, different `legs' that share the same source TP. In the example below, information is broadcast from one input to outputs A, B and C on three legs.
Figure 178. Example of Broadcast Connection with Three Legs A warning box indicates when the resources available for broadcast connections are exhausted. N.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform nonintrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original crossconnection with applying or removing the protection leg. 15.1.6 Cross-Connection Protection 15.1.6.1 Protected Unidirectional Connection A unidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output (primary route). In the case of a failure, the system automatically switches to the protection path from protection Input B to the Output. This second connection is permanently kept in hot standby operation.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
222/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 179. Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected N.B. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection. 15.1.6.2 Protected Bidirectional Connection A bidirectional connection is routed from Input A to the Output C (primary route). Input A (input protected) can be protected:
Figure 180. Bidirectional Connection - Input Protected N.B. By means of this connection are created links with SNCP protection. 15.1.6.3 Protected Broadcast Connection The protected broadcast is realized as a set of independent, protected, unidirectional connections using the same pair of input termination points. Each protection can be forced, locked out or switched independently. Therefore, if a failure occurs at a certain input, it is possible that only some of the protections of the protected broadcast actually switch to the protection input.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
223/388
Figure 181. Protected Broadcast Figure up. Shows a broadcast connection from input A to outputs A, B and C. Leg 2 and 3 are protected via input B, whereas leg 1 is not protected. In current release only one out of N legs can be protected. 15.1.6.4 Drop and Continue Connection
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
A Drop and Continue connection is a composed by: • • •
A unidirectional connection routed from Input A to the Output C and also to Input protecting B. A unidirectional connection from Input protecting B to Output C. A unidirectional connection from Output C to Input A.
Output C is protected; when receive from Input main the connection is defined normal, when receive from Input Protecting main the connection is defined inverse. All the connections are created in a single step of configuration.
Figure 182. Drop and Continue - Normal 15.2 Operative Sequence to execute Cross-Connections This paragraph lists general procedure to realize cross-connection moving among the various menus. Three main cases have been considered: • • •
An high order signal cross connection (AU4) An high order concatenated signal cross connection (AU4c) A low order signal cross connection (example : TU12)
Procedure for high order signal (AU4) • • •
•
ED
Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" ""Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management windows; a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field; a new window called "TP search" is opened.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
224/388
On the "Equipment" field select the Board, in the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 Click on "OK"; the "TP search" window is closed. In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created. o
• • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Procedure for AU4 concatenated (AU4c) N.B. Before to create an AU4 concatenated cross-connection is necessary to define that the AU4s on a STM-4 board are concatenated as explained. • • •
•
• • • •
Select "Transmission" option from the "Views" menu Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management" Click on "Create" in the Cross Connection Management window; a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field; a new window called "TP search" is opened. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board, in the "Termination Points" field select the concatenated AU4c (syntax example: r01sr1sl08/port#01-#01AU4P-4c) Click on "OK"; the "TP search" window is closed. In the "Main Cross Connection" window repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created.
Procedure low order signal (example TU12) • •
Select "Transmission" option from the "View" menu Select "Transmission" ""Add TP"; a new window called "Tp search" is opened. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board, In the "Termination Points" field select the AU4 and click on "OK";
In the transmission window the AU4 block is displayed; • • •
Select "Transmission" " "Terminate TP" ; a cross is displayed on the AU4 block Click twice on the AU4 block and on the VC4 block that appears, then selecting the showed TUG3 Select "Transmission" " "Structure TPs" " then selecting the structure
N.B. The AU4 is then terminated on a VC4 of the matrix circuit of the COMPACT ADM unit. The VC4 is automatically choose and indicated as "port # n", where "n" is the VC4 number. This connection will appear on the Cross Connection Management view in a independent line.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
225/388
• • • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
• • • •
If TU12 (example) are selected, in the transmission window clicking twice on the TUG3 and TUG2 blocks the TU12 are displayed Select the TU12 to be used Select "Transmission" " "Cross Connection" " "Cross Connection Management"; a new window called "Cross Connection Management" is opened. In the "Cross Connection Management" window click on "Create" button; a new window called "Main Cross Connection" is opened. o Select the correct value in the fields "Type" and "Protection" Click on "Choose" relative to the "Input" field; a new window called "TP search" is opened. o On the "Equipment" field select the Board, In the "Termination Points" field select the structured TP (example: TU12 1.1.1) Click on "OK"; the "TP search" window is closed. Repeat the same on the "Output" field and on the "Prot. Input" field for protected connections Click on "OK" in the "Main Cross Connection" window to terminate the creation and subsequently click on "Cancel" to go to the "Cross Connection Management" window. Click on "Search" in the "Cross Connection Management" window to see the new crossconnection created.
15.3 Cross-Connections management A list of cross-connections can be displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view or via Configuration menu. Transmission view is presented with the View " Transmission pull down menu. Port view is presented with the View " Equipment pull down menu, then clicking on the presented objects with the sequence board>port.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
226/388
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
227/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 183. Cross connection management cascade menu The Cross-Connection Management dialog is initially empty. A list of cross-connections is displayed in the Cross-Connection Management dialog after selecting the Search command. There are two possibilities of displaying a list of cross-connections: •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Do not enter any search criteria and press the Search button to display a list of all existing cross-connections, Enter Search Criteria (one or more) and then press the Search button to display a selection of cross-connections. Set Ignore for attributes not to be used as filtering criteria.
Use button Cancel Search to cancel an active search request or close the dialog. 15.3.1 Search Criteria •
Name (not supported.) Number of the cross-connection (automatically assigned)
•
ACD (not supported.) Enter the Access Control Domain of the relevant cross-connections: E= connection made with 1353SH, M= connection made with 1354RM, empty= connection made with CT. This filter option can only be used, if at least one ACD is defined on the NE and one or more cross-connections are assigned to this ACD(s).
•
Type Select the connection type:
• • • •
Unidirectional Bidirectional Multipoint Drop Continue
•
Protection Select protection functionality:
• •
Protected Not protected
•
TP Class Select one of the TP types involved in the requested cross-connection.
•
State
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
228/388
Select the connection state: • •
Activated Deactivated (not operative in current release, the connection state is always Activated)
•
Prot. State
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the protection state: • • • • • • • • •
Forced to Input Forced to Protecting Manual Switch to Input Manual Switch to Protecting Auto. Switch to Input Auto. Switch to Protecting Lockout Normal I Normal P
•
TP ID Prefix
Enter the TP type and physical location of the port, or only the physical location at least down to board level, according to the following format: Rsb/port#-TP. The # within brackets identifies a number.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
229/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 184. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (Initial State) 15.3.2 Cross-Connection List After a successful search, a read only list of cross-connections matching the search criteria appears. The number of matching cross-connections is displayed in the upper left corner of the list. The list contains information concerning the following parameters for each cross-connection: •
Prot. State Detailed switching information in the format: (: -, [: -])
•
Normal, Auto, Lockout, Forced or Manual.
•
Indicates the location of current traffic: P (Protecting input) or I (Input).
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
230/388
•
Indicates the location of the error signal: P (Protecting input) or I (Input)
•
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Indicates the signal state: SD (Signal Degrade) or SF (Signal Failure) •
Status of the switch: C (completed) or p (pending) Example: Auto I (P: SD-c) There has been an Automatic switch from the protecting input to the Input where the traffic is currently located. The reason for the automatic switch was Signal Degrade in the Protecting input. The switch was completed.
•
State Connection state indicating whether cross-connection is A (activated) or D (deactivated)
•
Dir. Direction-related connection type: uni (directional), bi(directional) or mp (multipoint), DC_N (Drop & Continue Normal) or DC_I (Drop & Continue Inverse)
•
Input Signal source; contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format ---, #TP The # within brackets identifies a number.
•
Protecting Input Protecting source (for protected cross-connections only); contains the TP type and physical location of the port according to the format rsb/port#-TP. The # within brackets identifies a number.
•
ED
Output
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
231/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Signal destination for point-to-point cross-connections, the TP ID of the destination is specified according to the format rsb/port#-TP ; for multi- leg cross-connections, the string "multiple Legs" appears instead. At the bottom of the dialog is a range of buttons to start actions on the listed cross-connections. Before starting any action apart from creation or printing, mark at least one cross-connection. To mark several cross-connections (multi-select) that are listed in succession, select the first crossconnection of a block with a mouse click and the last one with a mouse click while pressing the key. Or, mark a number of individual cross-connections by clicking the mouse button while pressing the key. Deselect cross-connections by clicking on the respective row while simultaneously pressing the key. To deselect a number of cross-connections at a time, press the key and hold it down while moving the mouse pointer to the last entry. All actions that may affect traffic must be confirmed. A confirmation dialog pops up in this case and the user has to confirm the requested action.
Figure 185. Cross-Connection Management Dialog (After Search) 15.3.3 Actions available The following actions are available: •
ED
Create a cross-connection.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
232/388
The Main Cross-Connection dialog is opened. •
Modify a Cross-Connection. Available if just one cross-connection is selected from the list. The Main CrossConnection dialog is opened.
•
Activate a Cross-Connection.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative. •
Deactivate a Cross-Connection. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list. Not operative.
•
Delete a Cross-Connection. Available if at least one cross-connection is selected from the list.
•
Split a Cross-Connection. Available if at least one bidirectional cross connection is selected from the list.
•
Join Cross-Connections. Available if two cross connections are selected. Not operative.
•
Protection Switching. Available if exactly one protected cross-connection is selected from the list. The Protection Actions dialog is opened.
•
Print.
Prints the filtered list of cross-connections. The dialog has to be closed explicitly. 15.4 Create/Modify Cross-Connections Creation and modification of cross-connections are performed in the Main Cross-Connection dialog. The dialog can be accessed via the Transmission or Port view as for the following menus example or by using the Create or Modify buttons in the Cross-Connection Management dialog. The dialog box of Figure below is presented ( “Main Cross Connection”view).
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
233/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
To prevent operation faults, the system is designed according to the following guidelines: • • •
All operations that may affect traffic must be confirmed. The subsystem provides a confirmation dialog box before the operation can be executed. If the window displays an existing cross-connection, the OK button is insensitive when this cross-connection is assigned to NML or it is not assigned to the user profile. If the window is used to create a new cross-connection, the system verifies that the relevant TPs can be used (not assigned to NML and assigned to the user profile) after the OK button is pressed. If a specified TP is not permitted, the corresponding message box appears.
15.4.1 Cross-Connection Parameters The "Main Cross Connection" permits to create the cross connections. A cross-connection is defined through a set of parameters, which depend on the connection and protection type. Only those parameters, which are permitted within the current context, can be accessed. All others are disabled (faded gray). To create a cross-connection, one or more of those parameters must be defined according to the cross-connection type. Table 1. Gives an overview about the optional and mandatory input parameters for the various cross-connection types. Activate the relevant entry boxes first of all by clicking on them with the mouse. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
234/388
Configurable Parameters •
Type
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the connection type: • • •
Unidirectional Bidirectional Drop Continue
•
D&C Topology Select the direction for Drop Continue:
• •
Normal Inverse
•
Protection Define protection state:
• •
Protected Not Protected
•
Prot. Criteria (only available for protected connections) Clicking on the Prot. Criteria button, for the Protection Criteria dialog is opened, where the user can display and configure the SNCP Type Protection. No protection criteria for automatic protection switching can be configured. The following SNCP Type is available:
• • •
ED
SNCP-I (Inherently monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-N (Non-intrusively monitored Sub-Network Connection Protection) SNCP-S (Sub-layer Sub-Network Connection Protection) (Not operative in current release)
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
235/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 186. Protection Criteria •
Revertive (available only for protected connections) Select whether protection is to be revertive or not. In Revertive mode, a protected service is switched back to its initial, protected element when the fault has been eliminated. When Revertive mode is active, the Wait To Restore protection period prevents several protection switches being initiated as a result of an intermittent failure. The protected element must be error- free during this defined period of time before a protected service is switched back to it. The Wait To Restore time period is fixed to 5 minutes. In Non-revertive mode, switchover to the protecting element is maintained even after the fault has been eliminated.
•
HOT (available only for protected connections) Not operative in current release To enter the Hold Off Time expressed in msec. HOT is the time between declaration of Signal Degrade or Signal Fail, and the initialization of the protection switching algorithm.
•
Input To enter the input TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly.
•
ED
Prot. Input
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
236/388
To enter the protecting TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. •
Output
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
It is possible to enter one or more output TPs. To enter one output TP, click the relevant Choose button and select the TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. To enter more than one output TP and create a broadcast connection, proceed as described previously and press button Add afterwards. The previously chosen TP is then moved to the list box located below. Click the Choose button and select the next TP in the TP Search dialog. Otherwise, select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. Repeat this procedure for each destination TP. A list of all the selected output TPs is displayed in the list box located below it. To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. N.B. Non-intrusive Monitoring Adding a protection leg to a unidirectional cross-connection offers the ability to perform non- intrusive monitoring on this cross-connection. No errors are introduced to the original cross-connection with applying or removing the protection leg. Table 5. Optional and Mandatory Configurable Parameters for Cross-Connection Creation Input Parameters Type D&C Topology Protection Protection Criteria HOT (NOT operative) Protected Revertive Input Protecting Input Output
Unidirectional/Bidirectional Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional/Bidirectional Normal/inverse Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One TP
_ X One TP One TP One TP
Broadcast Cross Connection Not Protected Protected Unidirectional _ _ Not Protected Protected _ SNCP-1 SNCP-N _ X _ _ One TP _ One or more TPs
_ _ One TP One TP One or more TPs
_ not available x configuration optional Non-configurable Parameters •
CC Topology The topology of the cross-connection is indicated via two icons. The left-hand icon displays the current topology and the right one displays a view of the topology following confirmation of the current modifications. In addition, the color of an icon indicates the connection state of the cross-connection:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
237/388
Green -> active Brown -> inactive The icon is set according to the entries made in Type and Protection:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
TPs not cross connected
Unidirectional, not protected
Bidirectional, not protected
Unidirectional, protected
Bidirectional, protected
Broadcast, not protected
Broadcast with one protected leg
Drop & Continue normal
Drop & Continue inverse
Loopback connection: unidirectional, same input and output TP Figure 187. Cross-Connection Icons Example:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
238/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 188. Creation of a Unidirectional, Non-Protected Cross-Connection -- Input TTI The received Trail Trace Identifier of the far end signal is displayed. Not operative in the current Release. -- Output TTI The Trail Trace Identifier of the transmitted (near end) signal is displayed. Not operative in the current Release. 15.4.2 Create a Cross-Connection This chapter lists the steps the user has to take to create a cross-connection using The "Main Cross Connection" For a detailed description of the single parameters. For information on cross-connection types. N.B. After creation of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. Create a Point-to-Point Cross-Connection (unit- or bidirectional) 1) Select the cross-connection type . 2) Select the protection state. 3) Select or type in the input TP. To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog, or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. The Search for Cross Connection Input dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all not connected AU-4 TPs of a rack, first select the rack in the left list box, then select the filter criteria Connection State "not connected" and Class "AU-4" and click on button Search. The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. 4) Select or type in the output TP as described in Step 3). The following steps only apply to protected cross-connections: 5) Select or type in the protection TP as described in Step 3). 6) Configure the Revertive mode 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot.Criteria) 8) The Hot (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button Ok to confirm the creation.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
239/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 189. Create a Bidirectional Protected Cross-Connection Create a Broadcast Connection 1) Select the cross-connection type "unidirectional" 2) Select the protection state. 3) Select or type in the input TP. To enter the TP, click the Choose button and select the TP in the Search for Cross Connection Input dialog or select the input field and enter the name of the TP directly. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
240/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This dialog offers the possibility to list TPs according to different filter criteria. E.g. to obtain a list of all TU12 TPs of a board, first select the board in the left list box, then select the filter criteria Connection State "Ignore" and Class "TU12" and click on button Search TPs . The matching TPs are listed in the right list box. Select the input TPs in the list and confirm with Ok. For a more detailed description on the Search for Cross Connection. 4) Select or type in the output TPs as described in Step 3 ) Press the button Add Leg in the Main Cross Connection dialog and all output TPs are displayed in the list box under the output field. To delete a leg from the list, select the TP in the list box and click on the Delete Leg button. The following steps only apply to protected broadcast connections: 5) Select or type in the protection input TP. Note that each single protected leg of the broadcast has to be assigned to the same protecting input. Proceed as described in Step 3 ). Afterwards, select the protected output TP in the output list box and click button Protect Leg. The leg is then marked as "protected" in the list box. Repeat this procedure for each protected output TP (only one protected leg is supported in current release). To unprotect a leg from the list, select the protected TP in the list box and click on the Unprotect Leg button. 6) Configure the criteria for automatic protection switching. 7) Configure the Protection Criteria (Prot.Criteria) 8) The HOT (Hold Off Time) is not operative in current release Press the button Ok to confirm creation.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
241/388
Figure 190. Search for Cross-Connection Output
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
242/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 191. Create an Unprotected Broadcast Cross-Connection
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
243/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 192. Create a Protected Broadcast Cross-Connection
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
244/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
15.4.3 Modify a Cross-Connection When modifying a cross-connection, note that some of the transformations involved may affect traffic (because the system may have to destroy and re-create the cross-connection to perform the necessary transformation). As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, the user is required to confirm operations affecting traffic, i.e. a confirmation window warns the user. Within the Main Cross Connection dialog, modification of a cross-connection is restricted to the protection state and the parameters required by the protection. Refer to Table 2. For an overview of the accessible parameter when the protection state has been changed from "not protected" to "protected" and vice versa. For a description of the parameters, please refer to the previous Para. 1.1.1 on page 2. To modify a cross connection selects one from the connection list and then click on the Modify button. N.B. After modification of a cross-connection, the cross-connection list in the Cross Connection Management dialog is not automatically updated. Use button Search in this dialog to update the list. Table 6. Modifiable Parameters Input Parameters Modification Not Protected to Protected Protected to not Protected _ _ Type D&C Topology Normal/inverse Normal/inverse Protection Protected Not Protected Protection Criteria X _ HOT (NOT operative) X _ Unprotected _ X Protected X _ Revertive X _ Input X X Protecting Input X _ Output X X _ Not available
X configuration optional The following few facts should be taken into consideration when modifying connections. Unprotect a protected cross-connection: When a protected cross-connection is being unprotected (protection changed to "not protected"), the dialog displays the additional option button Unprotected. It offers the choice of whether to keep the protected input TP (Input) or the protecting input TP (Prot. Input) as the only signal source of the new unprotected cross-connection. Ensure that the active TP is selected (i.e. check the protection state in the Cross-Connection Management dialog). An example is in the following Figure.. In addition, a question box appears, asking the user to confirm the unprotect action.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
245/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 193. Unprotect a Unidirectional Cross-Connection •
Protect an unprotected cross-connection: When an unprotected cross-connection is being protected, the Prot. Input button is available to select the protection input connection to insert. An example is in the following Figure.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
246/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 194. Protect one Leg of a Broadcast Connection 15.5 Activate/Deactivate/Delete Cross-Connections 15.5.1 Activate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. The Cross Connection Management dialog provides the possibility of displaying a selection of existing cross-connections. The connection state (Act = A or D) is indicated in this connection list. To activate a cross-connection, select one from the connection list (see) and then click on the Activate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
247/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
change request. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = A). If the set of cross-connections selected from the list includes both activated and deactivated crossconnections, clicking the Activate button only initiates actions on the deactivated cross-connections, which were selected. 15.5.2 Deactivate a Cross-Connection Not supported in current release. After creation, a cross-connection is automatically in an active state. To deactivate a crossconnection, select one from the connection list and then click on the Deactivate button to initiate the process. A confirmation box appears in which to confirm the state change request. The connection in the list is automatically updated to indicate the new connection state (Act = D). If the set of cross-connections selected from the list inc ludes both activated and deactivated crossconnections, clicking the Deactivate button only initiates actions on the activated cross-connections, which were selected. 15.5.3 Delete a Cross-Connection Only deactivated cross-connections should be deleted. However, deletion of active crossconnections is possible. NOTE: the “Delete cross–connection”action is not possible in the case that is still existing any operation/connection/termination on the underlying supported signals, such as: •Performance Monitoring on lower or higher TPs •POM / HPOM operations •Lower order Connections •Higher order Connections •Lower/Higher order Path Terminations •Loop–backs •LAN/LAPD (and any comm/routing channel) •Auxiliary channels Thus the deletion of every active operation/connection/termination is necessary, in the same order as above listed, before the deletion of a cross–connection. To delete a cross-connection, select the corresponding connection from the list and click on the Delete button. To prevent operation errors, the user must confirm the deletion request. The deleted cross-connection automatically disappears from the connection list when the operation is successful. 15.6 Split and Join Cross-Connections Not supported in current release. 15.6.1 Split a Cross-Connection Precondition Only bidirectional cross-connections can be split. Split Select one or more bidirectional cross connections from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press Split. The cross-connections are split without further confirmation from the user.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
248/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. The user has to press Search to see the new cross connections. Depending on the protection state of the original cross-connection, the split action has the following effect: a) Unprotected Cross-Connection An unprotected bidirectional cross-connection is split into two unidirectional crossconnections with the input TP in one of them being the output in the other and vice versa (see Figure below.). The new cross connection has the same name and activation status as the old bidirectional one.
Figure 195. Split/Join Unprotected Bidirectional Cross-Connection b) Protected Cross-Connection Splitting a protected connection results in one protected unidirectional cross-connection and one broadcast with two legs. The input of the original cross-connection is one of the legs in the broadcast. The other leg in the broadcast is the protecting input. The input of the broadcast is the output of the original protected cross-connection.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
249/388
Figure 196. Split/Join to Protected Bidirectional Cross-Connection 15.6.2 Join Two Cross-Connections Precondition Two cross-connections can be joined if they match the following characteristics: •
The connections are either
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1) Both unprotected, unidirectional and the input is the output of the other one, or 2) One of them is protected and unidirectional, and the other one a broadcast with two legs. Restriction: the input of the broadcast connection has to be the output of the protected connection and the legs of the broadcast match the input and the protection input of the unidirectional connection, also refer to Chapter Split a Cross-Connection, effect b). • •
Both cross-connections have the same connection state (activated or deactivated). Both cross-connections have the operational state "enabled", i.e. they are listed in black color in the Cross Connection Management dialog.
Join Select exactly two cross connections in the Cross Connection Management dialog and press the Join button. The cross-connections are joined without further confirmation from the user. The original cross connection(s) disappear from the list in the Cross Connection Management dialog after a successful action. Press Search to see the new cross-connections in the list. The result is either a bidirectional or a protected bidirectional cross-connection. If the original cross-connections have different names, the new name is a concatenation of the names of both of them. 15.7 Protection Switching The Protection Actions dialog is displayed after clicking on the Protection button in the Cross Connection Management dialog. Users can only switch protection on cross-connections belonging to them and not assigned to the NML. A second condition is that protection is enabled for the cross-connection concerned (protection parameter is set to "protected"). The three protection actions Force, Lock Out and Manual Switch belong to different levels, whereby Lock has the highest priority and Manual Switch the lowest. Note that a protection state can only be changed within the same or from a higher priority level, e.g. Force To Protecting can be reverted with Release but not with Manual Switch To Input.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
250/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 197. Protection Actions Dialog The dialog window enables the user to perform protection- related operations on protected crossconnections. These are: •
Force to Input (not operative in current release) The cross-connectio n is switched to the protected input regardless of signal quality. Automatic protection is disabled.
•
Force to Protecting (Input) The cross-connection is switched to the protecting input regardless of signal quality. Automatic protection is disabled.
•
Release Force Forced switching is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled.
•
Manual Switch to Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protected input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protected path is worse than on the protecting path.
•
Manual Switch to Protecting Input (not operative in current release) The user can switch over to the protecting input manually. Switching over is not executed if the signal quality on the protecting path is worse than on the protected path.
•
ED
Release Manual Switch (not operative in current release)
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
251/388
A manual switch is disabled and automatic protection switching re-enabled. •
Lock Out to Invoke The connection path is locked for protection switching, i.e. neither forced nor manual switching can be performed.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Release Lock
The protection lock is disabled. N.B. All the operations listed are context-dependent and are enabled or disabled ("grey") accordingly. After completion of protection switching, the list entry in the Cross Connection Management dialog is updated automatically. After clicking on an action button and completing the action initiated, the dialog disappears automatically. 15.8 Print This option is used to print the currently filtered cross-connection list and the related filter settings on the default printer or to a file in postscript or ASCII format.
Figure 198. Select Printer N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
252/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 199. Select Output Format 15.9 Show Cross-Connected TPs An overview of signal flow can be requested by means of a user action. The user can select a TP and initiate the action Show Cross Connected TPs from the Transmission view.
The result is that all other TPs connected to the currently selected TP are displayed. A line indicates the connection. This functionality should only be applied selectively (either for a single TP or selected group of TPs). Expanding and hiding TPs that are associated with the currently selected TP (e.g. show all TPs that are above the TU12CTP) enables all the related TPs to be added to the view so that the complete signal flow can be illustrated.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
253/388
Figure 200. Show Cross Connected VC4 of an AU4
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
254/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
16 Overhead management 16.1 Introduction The purpose of this set of dialogs is to handle the operations on the Overhead (OH) bytes of the NE. The possible operations are:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Overhead cross-connection - Cross-connection between 2 or more OH bytes - Termination of an OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel - Total Pass-through of the MSOH bytes for some cards - Definition of the Phone Parameters
There is a TP associated to every OH byte and to every auxiliary port, so TP could be used instead of OH bytes or auxiliary port, depending on the context. 16.2 OH Connection overview Here are described the possible OH connections •
OH Cross-connection
The operator has to be able to cross-connect 2 or more OH bytes on 2 different boards. The possible cross-connection types are: •
Unprotected bidirectional point to point
The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the cross-connection are the following: • •
Create the OH TPs involved in the operation Create the OH cross-connection: - Select type of cross-connection - Select the input OH TP involved in the operation - Select the output OH TP involved in the operation
After having deleted an OH cross-connection, the involved TPs have to be deleted. •
OH Termination
The operator has to be able to terminate one OH byte onto an auxiliary port or vocal channel. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the OH bytes termination are the following:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
255/388
• •
Create the OH TP involved in the operation Create the OH byte termination: - Select the created OH TP - Select the auxiliary port/vocal channel TP involved in the operation
After having deleted an OH byte termination, the involved TP have to be deleted.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Total MSOH Pass-through
For STM ports it make sense to allow the operator to perform a total pass-through of the MSOH bytes. A total msoh pass-through connection (connection between msPassThroughCTP points) is set-up only if no single msoh pass-through connection are set and if no single msoh crossconnection are set. If a total msoh pass-through connection is set, a single msoh pass-through connection or a single msoh cross-connection cannot be set. The steps an operator has to do in order to perform the total MSOH pass-through are the following: • •
Create the msPassThroughCTP points involved in the operation Create the total MSOH pass-through: - Select the input msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation - Select the output msPassThroughCTP point involved in the operation
After having deleted a total MSOH pass-through, the involved msPassThroughCTP points have to be deleted. 16.3 Overhead views The Overhead Views allows performing the previously presented operations. To access select Overhead option from the Configuration pull down menu; the following options are presented in the cascading menu. • • • •
ED
OH Cross Connection. OH Phone Parameters. OH TP creation. OH TP deleting.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
256/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 201. Overhead options The options are described in next paragraphs. 16.4 OH Cross Connection Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Cross Connection option. The Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog opens and allows to start the configuration.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
257/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 202. Cross Connection Management for Overhead dialog It is similar to the dialog used for the cross-connection of the TP for paths , then the same description and functions are valid. Next configuration steps use the Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog and the TP Search dialog, also in this case already described for path management.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
258/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 203. Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog There is one big difference between the OH TPs and the other kinds of TPs: the OH TPs have to be: • •
Created ONLY BEFORE a cross-connection/termination operation involving them has been performed. Deleted AFTER a cross-connection/termination deleting involving them has been confirmed.
The current implementation of the TP Search Dialog (TPSD) works only with created TPs. In the following a description of the main functions and commands is given, also to list the Supported and Not Supported operation. Cross-Connection Management for Overhead dialog •
ED
Supported operations
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
259/388
o
Search cross connections/terminations according to one or more of the following filtering attributes: type, TPs . The operator can set the filtering criteria, can start the search and select one or more cross connections/terminations among those presented in a read-only list as a result of the search operation. For each cross connection/termination matching the filtering criteria, the following information is shown: direction (bidirectional) and the input, output TPs involved ;
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
After choosing one or more cross connections/terminations, this dialog allows to: • •
Delete the selected xconnection/termination Go to the "Main Cross Connection for Overhead" dialog and modify the existing cross connection/termination
Note: this dialog disappears only when the user explicitly clicks on the close button. Delete operations can be performed on several cross connections/termination at the same time. Modify operations can be performed only on single cross connections/terminations. The OH xconnections are automatically active at the moment of their creation. The operation buttons availability follows some rules: •
The Delete and Print buttons are enabled only if at least one item is selected from the list. A special dialog will ask the user for a confirmation.
• •
The modify button is enabled if one (and only one) item is selected. It brings up the Main cross connection dialog. The create button is always enabled. It brings up the Main cross connection Dialog.
When some operation may affect the existing traffic, the operator is warned about that, and a confirmation dialog must be answered to carry on/cancel the operation. The choices for this dialog are: yes/no for single items, yes to all/cancel for multiple items •
Not Supported operation
When used for OH purposes, the Cross-Connection Management dialog doesn't support the following functionalities: • • • •
Protect cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are unprotected Activate/Deactivate cross connections/terminations: all the OH cross connections/terminations are automatically active since their creation Split cross connection/termination Modify Cross Connection Termination
16.4.1.1 Main Cross-Connection for Overhead dialog See Figure up. According to the philosophy of offering only meaningful operations to the user, and being the OH cross connection operations a subset of those applying to the general cross connections (e.g: protections are not allowed), some fields of this dialog are disabled. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
260/388
By clicking on the proper portions of the dialog and on the proper buttons, the operator can perform the operations hereafter listed: • • •
Selection of the cross-connection type Selection of the input TP involved in the cross-connection Selection of the output TP involved in the cross-connection
In order to do that the operator can either type in the involved TPs ID or use the TP Search dialog.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Supported operations o When creating a new cross connection, some or all of the following operations are available, depending on the NE type characteristics: o Choose one input TP o Choose one output TP It is possible to directly type in the TP name or to click on the Choose button to select a TP from the TP Search dialog box
16.4.1.2 TP Search dialog The TP Search dialog currently offers: • •
Navigation rack/subrack/board/port A list of TPs to choose from
When used in the OH domain, this dialog is a subcase of the most generic TP Search. The operator can choose among a list of: • • • • • •
All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified class: no board selected and MS, RS or VC class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port: board/port selected and no TP class selected All the possible OH TPs belonging to a specified board/port and class: board/port selected and MS, RS or VC class selected All the OH TPs already connected (also accordingly to the connection type) All the OH TPs not yet connected A combination of the above options
In this Network Element to connect the auxiliary / vocal channels and the Overhead bytes the following operative indication must be observed: - The auxiliary and vocal channels TPs are in the SERVICE board of slot 1 The auxiliary channels are: •
2 x G.703 2Mbit/s (not operative in current release); in the screen are indicated as: - R01sr1sl11/port#05-P Expanding this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented - R01sr1sl11/port#06-P
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
261/388
Expand ing this TP, 31 referred TPs are presented •
4 x G.703 64Kbit/s; in the screen are indicated as: - R01sr1sl11/port#07-P - R01sr1sl11/port#08-P
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- R01sr1sl11/port#09-P - R01sr1sl11/port#10-P •
4 x V11; in the screen are indicated as: - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v11TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v11TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v11TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v11TTP
•
4 x V24; in the screen are indicated as: - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-v24TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#02-#01-v24TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#03-#01-v24TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#04-#01-v24TTP
•
1 x phonic interface (voice channel); in the screen are indicated as:
R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP Expanding this TP, four referred TPs are presented - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#01-q23TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#02-q23TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#03-q23TTP - R01sr1sl11/port#01-#04-q23TTP - The other boards used to terminate or cross-connect the OH bytes are the STM -n boards. The OH TP is present in MS, RS and VC4 TP Class. In these TPs the indication "...#0011 to 0099 (MS or RS) are referred to the coordinates of the Section Overhead bytes on the SDH frame (1,1 to 9,9) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
262/388
The voice channel are identified by the "ow" indication, the "FU" is for Future Use, the "NU" is for National Use, "UC" is for User Channel and "Pass" is for Pass through channel. The examples of the figure in this OH connection chapter can be helpful to the operator 16.5 OH TP creation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP creation option. The OH TP creation dialog opens and allows to create the OH TP to cross connect. In detail, the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: - a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be created. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only not created OH Tps. To visualize the OH TP in the TP Search view double clicks on the MS, RS or VC4 Tp. - OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be created. Apply button is used to perform a create request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. After having performed the create request, the OH Tp field is set to empty. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 204. OH TP creation
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
263/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 205. OH Search TP for creation 16.6 OH TP deleting Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH TP deleting option. The OH TP deleting dialog opens and allows deleting the OH TP no more involved in an OH cross-connection. In detail, the dialog-box contains the following graphical object: - a Choose button is used to display a list of OH Tps to be deleted. The Choose button starts the TP Search with predefined filtering; the TP Search dialog allows the operator to visualize only created and not cross-connected OH Tps. - OH Tp field displays the label of the selected OH Tp to be deleted. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
264/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Apply button is used to perform a delete request of the TP displayed in the OH Tp field. After having performed the delete request, the OH Tp field is set to empty. Close button close the dialog without changes of the data. Help button provides some useful information about the dialog.
Figure 206. OH TP deleting 16.7 OH Phone Parameters The OH phone parameters option permits to configure the telephone number and to manage the parameter "phonic extension". Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Overhead option and then from the cascading menu the OH Phone Parameters option. Figure below. Opens.
Figure 207. Phone Parameters dialog window In the window are presented: •
ED
The interface field (at the top) where can be selected the phonic interfaces to be configured.
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
265/388
• •
The phone number field, to set the telephone number for operator calls on the phonic interface. The phonic extension field, where enable or disable the extension of the selected phonic interface.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
If enabled the phonic signal is extended towards the external on the access panel of the NE. Not operative in current release Apply button performs the configuration change of the modified phone parameters of the selected phonic interface without close the dialog Close button close the dialog without changes of the data.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
266/388
17 Performance Monitoring
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
17.1 Introduction The Performance Monitoring domain on the NE covers the monitoring of counter values for trail termination points and connection termination points. Examples of these counters are Error Seconds (ES) and Severely Error Seconds (SES). The Performance Monitoring domain counts these errors during specified granularity periods (15 min, 24h) and stores the values in history data logs. For the purpose of quality supervision, the values of the error counters can be compared to userdefined threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a notification (threshold crossing alarm) is issued. The principle performance management functions are: • • •
Configuration of the counting interval for each performance measurement point. Collection of the performance data. Configuration of the quality thresholds that generate alarms and log records when predefined values are exceeded.
On the ETHERNET boards a set of performance counters are foreseen, for future releases ,for QoS and maintenance purpose. By selecting the GMAU TP and subsequently the Transmission >Performance menu, the following options are available: –Configure Performance Monitoring. Not operative in current release. –Display Current Data. Not operative in current release. –Display Maintenance Counter. Not operative in current release. 17.1.1 Overview These functionalities are described in the following chapters in addition to general information concerning performance monitoring on the NE. • • • • •
Chapter Configuration deals with the configuration of performance monitoring Chapter Display Current Data deals with displaying current performance data Chapter Display History Data deals with displaying history performance data Chapter PM Threshold Table Selection deals with the selection of threshold tables Chapter PM Threshold Table Modification/Display deals with the modification of threshold tables and permits or display the same
17.1.2 Supported Performance Counters The NE uses performance counters to count transmission errors. A set of performance counters is provided according to the Termination Point (TP), where performance measurement occurs. The user can start performance monitoring on one or more subsets of counters for each TP; it is not possible to start individual performance counters. Near end performance monitoring events are: • •
ED
Background Block Error (BBE): A BBE counter measures the number of error blocks, which do not occur as part of an SES. Error Second (ES): A one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect. 01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
267/388
• •
Severely Error Second (SES): A one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). An SES is also counted as an ES. Near End Unavailable Second (NEUAS): An Unavailable Second is a second, which is part of the Unavailable Time.
The corresponding Far End (FE) performance monitoring events are: •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
•
Far End Background Block Error (FEBBE): A far end error block, which does not occur as part of an FESES. Far End Error Second (FEES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period with one or more error blocks or with a defect, which were received by the Far End Terminal. Far End Severely Error Second (FESES): Identifies, at a terminal, a one second period which contains > 30% of error blocks, or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP) which was received/detected by the Far End Terminal. An FESES is counted as an FEE. Far End Unavailable Second (FEUAS): An Unava ilable Second is a second, which is part of the Unavailable Time at the far end.
The Termination Point (TP) type determines which performance monitoring events can be counted: - SDH TPs Both near end and far end counters are supported in receive direction of the signal for all SDH path layers and for the multiplex section layer. For the regenerator section, no far end information is transmitted and, therefore, only near end counting is supported. -
PDH TPs Only near end counters are supported in receive direction for all PDH path layers.
Further definitions: • • • •
•
•
Error Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits associated with the block are erroneous. Remote Error Indicator (REI) [formerly Far End Block Error (FEBE)] : Identifies, at a terminal, the count of error blocks that were received by the far end terminal. Remote Defect Indicator (RDI) [formerly Far End Receive Failure (FERF)] : indicates to a terminal that the far end terminal has detected an incoming failure. Unavailable Time (UAT): A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. Pointer Justification Event (PJE): A PJE is an inversion of I- or D- bits of the pointer, together with an increment or decrement of the pointer value to signify a frequency justification. Out of Frame Second (OFS): An AFS is defined as a second in which one or more out of frame events have occurred. This event is identified by the A1/A2 byte of the SDH Frame. The counting of OFS is sonly supported for the regenerator section termination. Please note that this counter is deprecated by ETSI and will be removed from international standards.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
268/388
17.1.3 Far End (FE) and Near End (NE) Performance Counting
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Far end performance monitoring parameters are derived from Remote Defect Indicators (RDI) and Remote Error Indicators (REI).
Figure 208. Far End Performance Monitoring Principles •
•
At Node A, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B. At Node B, the near end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from A to B, while the far end information represents the performance of the unidirectional section/path from B to A.
Near end performance data at Node A and far end performance data at Node B correspond as long as neither direction is disturbed, and vice versa. In compliance with ETSI and ITU-T standards, far end errors cannot be counted in the case of near end failures. 17.1.4 Bidirectional Counting (24 h Bi) for QoS As specified in G.826, G.784 and ETSI 300417, the bidirectional PM collection for Quality of Service has been supported by combining the information on each direction of transport to assess a single unavailability state: the bidirectional path is in the unavailable state if either one or both directions are in the unavailable state. PM data are collected by a single UAS plus two sets of three event counters (BEE, ES, SES) for NE-PM and FE-PM respectively. When the path transports unidirectional payload just the four counters for the NE-PM are activated (BEE, ES, SES and UAS). Data collection is performed only ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
269/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
on 24 hours registers and the NE maintains a buffer of two registers: the 24hours current registers and the historical one. 17.1.5 End to End (e-e 24h) Performance Counting VCn trails can be monitored in intermediate node through the activation of performance monitoring process on Monitoring function. As the trails are often responsible of the end-to-end customer service, the end-to-end monitoring can be requested provide monitoring for Quality of Service purposes and, in addition, for network Maintenance applications. If SNCP is configured the Quality of Service collection have to be enable in the monitoring functions after the matrix. End to end monitoring is achieved by activation of Performance monitoring on the two direction of path and using far-end primitives. This process can be unidirectional (for Monitoring) or bidirectional process (for QoS). In case of unidirectional process one direction can be monitored end to end and both 15minute and 24h collection can be activate 15min./24H FE_BBE_, FE-ES, FE-SES, FE-UAS on incoming or egress signal depending of the POM is enable. The TCA are also evaluated in both 15- minute and 24H counters. The bidirectional process need the presence on the two Monitoring functions in the two directions in one NE and among the two monitoring function a 24 hour collection can be activated with the collection of incFE_BBE, incFE-ES, incFE-SES, UAS, eFE-BBE, eFE-es, eFE-SES. 17.1.6 Performance Monitoring on AU-PJE AU PJE (Administrative unit point justification event) is an optional parameters request in G.784. For AU PJE counters, the positive and negative PJE shall be counted separately on one selectable AU within an STM-N signal, after the AU has been resynchronized to the local clock. Refer to G.783 The number of positive and negative outgoing PJE per second are collected in 15 minutes and 24 H counters. A history of 16 x 15minutes counters and 2 x 24H are stored in the NE for each AU selected. No Threshold crossing mechanism is supported on AU-PJE counters. 17.1.7 Tandem Connection Termination (TCT) and Monitoring (TCM) TCM allows monitoring within the operator domain. The quality within the operator's on domain can be proven regardless of the received quality of the signal at the entry point of the network. At the input point the reference value is set to zero by using the TCM feature. Tandem Connection Monitoring is applicable to VC-4-nc (n=1,4,16...), VC-4, VC-3 and VC-12 layers. TCM provides: - Incoming error count (IEC) - TC_REI to indicate error blocks within the TC to the far end; - OEI to indicate error blocks of the engrossing VC-n; - TC_API as access point identifier complying with generic 16-byte string format; - TC_RDI indicating to the far end that defects have been detected within the TC at the near end TC sink; 17.1.8 Performance Monitoring on 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA The feature provides PM data collection at the 2 Mbit/s ISDN–PRA terminations. The performance monitoring capabilities (applied on p12Mon TP) support both the standard data ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
270/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
collection modes: –G. 826 bidirectional for QoS –M2120 unidirectional near–end / far–end for maintenance 17.1.9 Performance Data Collection Near end and far end performance- monitoring events are counted over fixed monitoring periods of 15 minutes and 24 hours. The 24-hour monitoring periods start at 00: 00 (UTC) and the 15- minute monitoring periods start at xx: oo, xx : 30 and xx : 45. Performance monitoring can be enable and disables at any time during a monitoring period. An entity of all near end or far end performance monitoring events is always counted, it is not possible to start individual performance counters (e.g. SES only). BBE, ES and SES counting is stopped during Unavailable Time. Event Counting The performance events (e.g. SES) are counted in a counter per event. These counters are called the current register. At the end of the monitoring period, the contents of the current registers are transferred to the first of the recent registers, together with a time stamp to identify the period (including the day). Time stamping is performed using UTC (as for all alarms). After that, the current register is reset. It is also possible to reset an individual current register manually. Suspect Flag A suspect interval flag is set as an indication that the data of the corresponding register may be either incomplete or invalid. Zero Suppression Zero suppression is a basic mechanism to remove irrelevant PM information and to reduce the amount of PM reports in the system. A PM report is suppressed and hence no history record is created by the entity, which is responsible for PM reporting when all of the following conditions are true for the monitoring period: - An interval is error-free (all PM counter values are zero) - PM was enable enabled during the entire monitoring interval (the elapsed time equals its nominal value, i.e. 900 for 15 min. and 86400 for 24 h Configure Monitoring option in the Port pull down menu. N.B. To configure PM for au4CTPs and tuxCTPs, Path Overhead Monitoring (POM) or Supervised Unequipped Termination (SUT, not supported) or Tandem Connection (TCT, TCM) must be created first. The PM Configuration dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs and VcxCTP, the PM Configuration dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options as follow. - PathOverhMon After Matrix - PathOverhMon Before Matrix - TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) - TCM After Matrix - TCM Before Matrix - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
273/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
- TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix When more than one of the above options is chosen, a Question dialog box is displayed; click on Cancel to continue or OK to interrupt any action. N.B. As long as the PM Configuration dialog is open, a modified POM/SUT/TC configuration is not automatically recognized and displayed. This may lead to rejections or confirmations of forbidden PM configuration. Therefore make sure to reopen the PM Configuration dialog each time the POM/SUT configuration is changed. Each page label presents a range of parameters for one near end or far end granularity period (15 min. or 24 h), which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label: • • • • • •
NE15, near end 15 minutes page NE24, near end 24 hours page FE15, far end 15 minutes page FE24, far end 24 hours page 24hBi, near and far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end near end) e-e-24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
Each dataset has to be configured independently. For AU-4 CTP and TU-x CTP the highest criteria are POM and SUT. I.e. select the POM or SUT option first and then configure the different associated data sets. Confirm the configuration with Apply before you continue with a different POM or SUT option.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
274/388
Figure 209. PM Configuration Dialog (example)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
275/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 210. PM question dialog box (example) Activate any item within the page label by selecting the respective radio button. •
Mode •
Data Collection
Select this button to activate performance monitoring. Disabling Data Collection leads to clearance of the current and all history data of this entity. •
ED
Create History Data
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
276/388
If this item is selected, history data collection is performed in the selected entity for the corresponding TP. Note that on disabling this mode item, no history data is available. Nevertheless, datasets collected prior to deactivation are not cleared and are displayed after re-enabling the item, as long as the number of displayed datasets does not exceed 16 for 15 min. granularity.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Lock Data Collection. Not supported
If Lock is selected, PM remains enabled but data collection is stopped. All history performance data remain available. All current values are set to zero. •
EML OS Monitoring (only accessible from SH) Not available for Craft Terminal.
•
Notifications •
UAT (only available for 24 h granularity)
For 24 h granularity, UAT (Unavailable Time) notifications are created if enabled. This notification results in an UAT alarm in the Alarm Surveillance. N.B. This parameter can only be selected during creation and cannot be subsequently modified. •
Suppress Additional Threshold
Disabled: the alarm is generated every time the value exceed the upper threshold (value up). Enabled: after a first alarm generation, the alarm is generated again when the value exceeds the upper threshold (value up) after the lower threshold (value down) has been exceeded. •
Threshold Table Attach a threshold table to the selected TP. Only assign threshold tables that match the granularity period of the datasets (i.e. a 15 min. threshold table must not be assigned to a 24 h dataset). Otherwise the Transmission view is blocked and only released by closing and reopening the PM Configuration window and the Transmission view. Click on button Attach... to open the PM Threshold Table Select dialog (see) and configure the threshold table (see Chapter on page). Select button Remove to disassociate the threshold table from the entity. N.B. A threshold table can only be attached if Data Collection is enabled.
•
Set Alarm Severity UAT •
ASAP Id
This field shows the label of the ASAP pointer assigned to the UAT alarm
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
277/388
•
Set ASAP
Allows to set new ASAP pointer for the UAT alarm. The Set ASAP button opens the window displayed. Confirm the configuration with the button Apply before closing the dialog. Otherwise the configuration is lost.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
17.3 Display Current Data Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Select the TP and open the Current PM Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display Current Data.
This "Current PM Data" dialog serves to show the results and status of the Performance Monitoring counters. It is possible to access the same "Current PM Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display Current Data option in the Port pull down menu. The Current PM Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs, the Current PM Data dialog also contains an option button showing the configured POM and SUT options to display as follow: - PathOverhMon After Matrix - PathOverhMon Before Matrix - TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) - TCM After Matrix - TCM Before Matrix - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix - TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
278/388
Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min. or 24h) which together form a dataset. To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • •
15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
All datasets available, which are related to the selected TP and recorded in the current monitoring interval, are displayed in this dialog. The following items are indicated for each entity: •
Administrative State Indicates whether the PM collection is locked for the local user or not.
•
Operational State Indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled.
•
Suspect Data Indicates if collection errors occurred during the collection period.
• • •
Threshold Table Indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity. Current Problem List Indicates current UAT ("Unavailable") and TCA ("Threshold Crossed") alarms. N.B. The entry "Unavailable Threshold Crossed" indicates, that both alarms are active. Since the text field is too small to display the full text at a time, use the cursor to scroll the text field in this case.
•
Elapsed Time
Indicates the time, which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. This information tells the user whether the data collection covers the whole period. At the bottom the PM results are listed. Reset button is used to restart the counting period. Two buttons are present for near-end and farend periods. Press the Refresh button to update the window contents and display the latest data. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
279/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 211. Current PM Data Dialog (example) 17.4 Display History Data Use menu item Add TP to display a special TP in the Transmission view. Select the TP and open the PM History Data dialog by clicking on the menu item Display History Data.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
280/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This "PM History Data" dialog serves to show stored Performance Monitoring counting. It is possible to access the same "PM History Data" dialog selecting a TP in the "Port view" and opening the same Performance > Display History Data option in the Port pull down menu. The PM History Data dialog is designed as a notebook consisting of a text field, to identify the selected TP, and page labels. The selected TP is indicated in the first box at the top of the screen: TP Identifier. In case of au4CTP and tuxCTPs VCxCTPs, the PM History Data dialog also contains a cascading menu that allows choosing the POM and SUT options to display follow: - PathOverhMon After Matrix - PathOverhMon Before Matrix - TP (Performance is made on AU-PJE) - TCM After Matrix - TCM Before Matrix - TCT Bidirectional After Matrix - TCT Bidirectional Before Matrix Each page label presents a range of parameters for one "near end and far end" granularity period (15min., 24h, 24h bidirectional). To select a special page label, click on the top part of the label. All available datasets (entities), which are related to the selected TP, are displayed in the table: • • • •
15 min, near end and far end 15 minutes page 24 h, near end and far end 24 hours page 24hBi, far end 24 hours page bidirectional (UAS is the sum of far end and near end) e-e 24h, end to end 24 hours page (enable only on HPOM)
The PM data is displayed containing information concerning: •
Interval End Time In the format dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
281/388
• •
The number of recorded events concerning an entity is divided into near end and far end data Elapsed Time Indicating whether the data collection was complete.
•
Susp
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Indicating suspect data where collection errors occurred during the collection period. In case of 15 min. entities, a maximum of 16 datasets can be displayed simultaneously for each counter; the 24h entities display a maximum of one dataset. The user cannot change these figures. If the limit of 16 datasets for 15 min. granularity and 3 datasets for 24 h granularity is reached, the oldest set in the list is cleared when the next data set arrives. Using the Print button, PM data can be saved to a file or printed on paper. N.B. If no printer is installed, there is no error message displayed to indicate this.
Figure 212. PM History Data Dialog (example) 17.5 PM Threshold Table Selection The PM Threshold Table Select dialog pops up if the Attach button is clicked in the PM Configuration dialog.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
282/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In addition, this dialog can be accessed using the Configuration menu: N.B. Do not open several dialogs at the same time using both possibilities. Since those dialogs are not synchronized, they could display different contents. The dialog presents a list of existing threshold tables. The tables are individually indicated with a number. Each table is dedicated to specific entities, as reported in each table can be modified according the operator selections. The filtering criteria are not operative. The user can perform the following actions: • •
Create / Modify / Display a threshold table. Delete an existing threshold table Mark the table in the list and click on the Delete button. Note that a threshold table cannot be deleted if it is attached to a PM entity. An error message informs the user of this situation.
•
Attach the selected threshold table to a TP entity. It is only available entering from the PM Configuration dialog.
The user has to close the dialog explicitly by clicking on the button Close.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
283/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 213. PM Threshold Table Select Table 7. Threshold table entities association N Layer TP’s ASSOCIATED Granularity 1 STM4 RS 15 minutes 2 STM4 RS 24 hours 3 STM1 RS 15 minutes 4 STM1 RS 24 hours 5 STM4 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 6 STM4 MS NE / FE 24 hours 7 STM1 MS NE / FE 15 minutes 8 STM1 MS NE / FE 24 hours 9 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 10 VC4 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 11 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 12 VC3 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours 13 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 15 minutes 14 VC12 Path Termination NE / FE 24 hours After the activation of a PM on a TP, it will be signaled in the Port view and in the Transmission view as for the following figures: ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
284/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 214. PM Port View
Figure 215. PM Transmission View 17.6 PM Threshold Table Creation / Modification / Display 17.6.1 Creation The PM Threshold Table Create dialog pops up when the Create button is clicked in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog. Carry out the following steps to create a threshold table: 1) Enter the table name in input field Name . Leading and succession blanks are ignored. Leaving the input field blank or entering only blanks is not allowed and rejected. 2) Select a Granularity of 15 min. or 24 h fo r the entity. 3) Enter the set (Value Up) and the reset (Value Down) threshold values. Node that the reset value if supported, will be available with 15 min. monitoring periods. Table 1 shows the maximum performance monitoring event values. The respective value is automatically reset to the maximum if a larger figure is entered. 4) Select the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. 5) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. 6) Confirm the entries with Apply to create the threshold table. A number of threshold tables can be created from the same window. Explicitly close the window with button Close.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
285/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 216. Create PM Threshold Table 17.6.2 Modification The PM Threshold Table Modify dialog (see) pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog (see) and the Modify button is clicked. Carry out the following steps to modify a threshold table: 1) Modify the upper threshold value (Value Up) and the lower value (Value down) Table 1. Shows the allowed maximum performance parameter values. 2) Modify the alarm Severity for each PM attribute in case a threshold is crossed. 3) Disable Send notification if no notification message should be sent in the case of a crossed threshold. Note that the Name (really "number") cannot be changed. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
286/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
4) Confirm the modifications with Apply. 5) To modify more than one threshold table, do not close the dialog, but select the next threshold table in the PM Threshold Table Selection dialog and press the Modify button (see). Explicitly close the dialog with button Close. 17.6.3 Display The PM Threshold Table Display dialog pops up if a threshold table is selected in the PM Threshold Ta ble Selection dialog and the Display button is clicked. Refer to the previous chapter for a description of the attribute values and types. Table 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values Performance Parameter Max. Value for 15-min Max. Value for 24-h period period BBE, FEBBE on STM-4 8,639,100 829,353,600 BBE, FEBBE on STM-1 2,159,100 207,273,600 BBE, FEBBE on all the other board 539,100 51,753,600 OFS, ES, UAS, FEES, 900 86,400 SES, FESES 810 78,760 PJC high, PJC low 1,800,000 172,800,000
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
287/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 217. Modify PM Threshold Table 17.7 PM Overview MSP Overview allows displaying performance overview. Selecting the PM Overview option from the Configuration pull down menu figures below open.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
288/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 218. PM Overview Menu item
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
289/388
Figure 219. PM Overview
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
290/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 220. Add TP for PM Overview You can click “Add TP”button to see the PM data about the selected TP. Like the figure below.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
291/388
Figure 221. PM Overview after add TP
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
292/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
18 Synchronization management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
18.1 Introduction All SDH NEs require timing in order to generate the necessary synchronization and frame phase reference information. The timing can be provided by a source external to the NE or an internal timing generator. The derived timing shall be used for all signals and interfaces in the NE that are related to the SDH frame structure. Follows a brief description of the heart of the NE clock known as the Synchronization Equipment Timing Source (SETS). It can be divided into 2 parts: • •
OSC: the internal oscillator. SETG: the Synchronization Equipment Timing Generator.
The SETG is responsible for the generation of the external timing source for the Frame structure and the clock, whilst the internal oscillator is useful only in the abnormal functioning "Freerunning" mode that will be explained later. The simplified figure that follows represents the internal organization of the SETS.
Figure 222. Internal organization of the SETS. The internal sources (inputs) are: • • • •
T1: Reference obtained from incoming STM-N signals, T2: Reference obtained from incoming 2 Mbits signals, T3/T6: Reference obtained from an external incoming 2.048 MHz signal, OSC: the internal oscillator.
The number of timing reference inputs depends on the configuration of the NE.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
293/388
The external sources (outputs) are: • • •
T0: is the reference output signal for the clock and signal frames, T4: is the reference output for the external equipment synchronization. T5: is the 2 Mbit/s reference output for the external equipment synchronization
Other reference points:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
Y: is used for communication of Synchronization Status Message (SSM) between SETS and MST functional blocks. S15: is used to provide notifications and loss of incoming timing reference reporting to the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF).
Selector A provides the capability to select timing reference from available T1 inputs, either automatically based on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources (SSM algorithm), or manual as a result of commands issued from the managing system. Selector B is capable of selecting timing reference from T1, T2, or T3 inputs, according to the SSM algorithm. The capability for manual selection of the timing source is also provided. Selector C is only operated in manual mode, to switch between SETG output signal (T0) and a T1 timing reference. The squelch functions A and B mute the relevant timing references in the presence of failure condition, or SSM threshold violation. The choice of the timing reference is done in two ways: •
Automatically: Following a particular algorithm based on the quality and the priority of the incoming timing signals. The automatic selection is based either on the priority of the incoming timing source (Priority algorithm) or on the priority and the quality level of the incoming sources (SSM algorithm).
•
Manually:
Following an order from the Operator. N.B. The Operator for each candidate-timing source determines the priority level. It is static information. On the other hand, the quality of the source is dynamic information, dependant of the quality of the reference clock generating the timing. In an SDH signal frame, the quality of the timing source is located in the Section Overhead. The SETG has 3 modes of operation: •
Locked mode: The SETG output is fully controlled by the external timing references (T1, T2 and T3).
•
Hold-Over mode: The external timing reference is malfunctioning. The SETG during normal functioning stores regularly the value of the external timing reference. In this case the SETG output is controlled by this memorized value.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
294/388
•
Free running mode: This is not a normal operating mode. The external timing reference and the memorized timing reference are malfunctioning. In this case the SETG output is controlled by the internal clock source.
18.2 Synchronization Management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Timing Source Configuration, Protection Commands, T0 Configuration, T4 Configuration, T0 TEST Configuration (not operative in current release) SSU Configuration, Remove Timing Reference, Change T4 T5 Set T0 Equal T4 Change 2 MHz -> 2 Mbit (available only if T3 has been configured as timing source) Remove T0 Equal T4, Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration, Frame Mode Configuration Show Timing Source.
Before any other operation the synchronization view has to be displayed. 18.2.1 Displaying the Synchronization View The synchronization view can be normally opened using the menu Views options. Using menu options, select the Synchronization option from the Views pull down menu as shown in the following figure.
Figure 223. Obtaining the synchronization view Selecting this menu option the synchronization representation will be displayed directly into the current window instead of the current view. All the operations that can be done on the synchronization sources are performed from this synchronization view.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
295/388
18.2.2 Synchronization View The Synchronization view shows the external timing reference sources and the T0, T4 or T5, generation. The selection is based on the SSM algorithm or on the priority of the incoming timing sources. Activating the SSM algorithm implies that the selection of the source is before done on the quality criteria and then on the priority criteria for sources at the same quality level.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
After selecting the Synchronization option from the Views menu the Synchronization View is visua lized.
Figure 224. Synchronization View Example
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
296/388
Synchronization View Description The synchronization view provides two lists of allowable timing references:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
One for T0 timing output; T0 list is always present; One for T4 timing output; the presence of the T4 list is configurable using resource files.
T0 list contains: - A timing reference associated to the Internal Oscillator timing source; it is always present and it cannot be removed or redefined. - 6 max timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1, T2 or T3/T6 configurable by the operator. T4 list contains: - 6 timing reference for candidate inputs belonging to the allowable timing reference T1 configurable by the operator. The T0 and T4 lists are used for the management of reference timing source protection; a 1:n protection like mechanism is used for the selection of the timing source from T0 (T4) list of the allowable timing references, . The protection system chooses the timing reference to generate the output T0 (T4) either automatically, basing on the priority and quality level of the candidate sources according a selection algorithm or manually under control of the managing system. View elements description Here after, the basic component contained in the synchronization view are described: •
Timing reference
Each allowable timing reference, , is represented by the graphical object displayed in the view; the timing reference graphical object displays (with the exception of Internal Oscillator timing reference) the following information (if the timing source has been declared by the user): - The name of the selected timing source - The status of the synchronization source: (lockout, manual switch, force switch, automatic switch, no request, failure) - The label of the quality level of the timing input source - The priority of the timing input source - 2 small boxes representing the SSF (Los) and DRIFT alarms detected on the timing source; DRIFT means that the Frequency Offset between the external signal source and the internal clock is high then the maximum tolerance value. SSF means that the Server Signal Failure is sending a wrong reference signal to the NE. In case of alarm indication the operator can select Show Timing Source to visualize the alarm detail. In the timing reference graphical object associated to the Internal Oscillator the following information are displayed: - The name of the timing source: Internal Oscillator - A small box representing the LOS alarm; the small box will be lighted up when all the selected timing source are lost, indicating the Holdover or Free Running operation mode; - A label field representing the abnormal clock operation modes; one of the following strings can be displayed in the label field: - Holdover, displayed when the clock operates in Holdover mode; - Free running, displayed when the clock operates in Free Running mode - Empty string is displayed when the clock operates in Lock - A label "0" representing the priority of the Internal Oscillator ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
297/388
•
Selectors
Small ellipse are used to represent respectively: - The selector A; - The selector B; - The selector C;
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Squelch Status
Boxes contained a label field are used to represent the squelch statuses T0/T4 and T4. The box displays the configured quality level threshold and it is lighted up when the output-timing signal is inhibited. •
Output Signal
An arrow and a label field are used to represent respectively: - The output signal T0; - He output signal T4/T5; •
Line Type
The following different line type are used to link the output signals and the respective allowable timing reference: - A solid line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is currently used to generate that signal; - A dashed line between an output signal and an allowable timing reference means that timing reference is not currently in use as timing source but will act in the protecting role. In the same way, a solid line between T0 signal and T4/T5 signal (or T0_Test signal) box is drawn when T0 signal is used to generate T4/T5 18.2.3 Timing Source Configuration This functionality allows configuring the input synchronization sources and configuring or modifying the timing source priority and quality.
Figure 225. Synchronization Menu The menu options are grey according to the current state of the dialogue box that the user can open. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
298/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Firstly select a synchronization source reference and after the Synchronization menu to open the Synchronization Option List. Then select the Timing Source Configuration option from the cascading menu, as shown in the above figure. The following dialogue box is opened.
Figure 226. Timing source configuration for cross-Connect equipments The Timing source configuration dialogue box which opens, displays the extracted quality of the selected timing source. It permits to configure the following timing source information: • •
Quality level, Priority level
Extracted Quality is the actual Rx quality retrieved from the signal received from the line. Select an empty synch. Source reference and click on Timing Source Configuration and then on the Input Source Choice. Figure below shows an example of the opened windows. Following the TP Search procedure described in Para. On page (rack, subrack, board, port) enter the physical board termination point (TP) value; these TP are: EIS for electrical SDH port, OpS for optical SDH port. This operation can be repeated for the entire available empty synch. Sources both for T0 clock and for T4 clock.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
299/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 227. Synch. Source configuration for ADM equipment
Click on the Input Quality Configuration: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired quality le vel. Timing source may have, in increasing order, five quality levels: G.811, G.812T, G.812L, G.813, Q. Don't use (where the highest quality level is G.811). If Input Quality Configuration is set to a value other than "Extracted", Rx quality is forced to this value. Click on the Priority: the option button opens the option menu to select the desired priority level.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
300/388
The internal oscillator-timing source will have the lowest priority (priority=0) and its priority cannot be changed. The other timing sources will have a priority of 1 to n. Priority of 1 is the highest priority. Levels 6,...2 are intermediate levels between level 0 and 1, in increasing order of priority (i.e. 0 6 5 4 3 2 1).
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
When the configuration of the timing source is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. Positioning the mouse on the synch. Source box "Port#" test, the corresponding physical interface denomination (rack-subrack-board-port) is written on the window bottom left. 18.2.4 Synchronization Protection Commands Select the timing reference from the synchronization view. Select the Synchronization pull down menu. You can then select the Protection Commands to open the view. Menu options are grey. According to the current state of the selected timing source.
Figure 228. Lockout, Force and Manual commands a) Invoke/Release Lockout: Locking or unlocking a timing source enables or disables the timing source from being considered as a possible timing source for T0 or T4. b) Invoke/Release Force and Manual Selection of Timing Source General selection A timing source can be selected manually or automatically. Furthermore, the selection of a particular incoming timing source (except the internal oscillator) may be forced. This selection is independent of the priority or quality of the timing source. If the timing source is lockout or unavailable, this operation is impossible. A timing source is considered to be available if it is not lockout and has not a failure condition or Priority level of 0. Releasing terminates the forced switch mode or inhibiting the force selected timing source. The manual selection option is only possible if the quality and priority of the selected timing source are sufficient. Otherwise the automatic selection algorithm overrules the manual selection. If the previously manual selected timing source becomes unavailable the automatic selection is activated. The "Status" indication describes the current synch. status (No Request, Automatic Switch, Failure, ...) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
301/388
N.B. The internal oscillator cannot be forced or manually selected. From the dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the operation. To perform or release a T0 or T4 lockout, forced or manual selection, the following operations have to be done: • • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Select the T0 or T4 source. Click on the Synchronization menu. Select the Protection Commands option then invoke/Release the Lockout, Forced or manual Selection option. Click on Apply in the displayed confirmation box.
Manual selection is not operative in the current release 18.2.5 Synchronization Configuration for T0/T4 and T4 squelch criteria Select the available T0 or T4 synchronization sources and then the T0 or T4 Configuration... command. This command permits to select/deselect the SSM algorithm, to set the wait time to restore and to enable the revertive procedure if all these features are available. In this NE revertive mode is hardware set, with fixed WTR. In Revertive mode the internal selector A/B changes every time to the best reference clock with the highest quality; on the same quality level basis the reference clock Source with the best priority will be selected. The changing mechanism of the reference inputs is controlled by the wait time to restore: this time sets a delay before to change the input source. Selecting the T0 or T4 Configuration set the SSM algorithm and the Wait To Restore Time in the dialog box upper part. Click on the SSM Algo rithm to select/deselect it. Wait To Restore Time button and Revertive option button are disabled Selecting T4 Configuration it is possible to set the T4 squelch criteria in the bottom dialog box. This functionality allows configuring the external timing reference (T4) squelch criteria. The squelch function mutes the relevant timing references in the presence of a failure condition. Squelch may be forced by the Operator or according to squelch criteria, which consists in a choice of quality level. Different squelch criteria may be applied: • •
When T0 is selected to generate T4 (squelch B ): T0 may be squelched if all the allowable timing references of Selector B have Quality Level lower than the programmable threshold. When T1 is selected to generate T4 (squelch A ) :T1 may be squelched if T1 Quality Level is lower than the programmable threshold or if it becomes unavailable.
The T0/T4 and T1/T4 squelch fields enables you to configure the quality level of the T0 or T4 timing source, opening the relevant option menu. When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The T5 output field allows selecting the bit used (from #4 to #8) for SSM. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box. The T4 squelch configuration dialogue box enables you to configure the quality level of the T4 timing source. Click on the T0: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. Click on the T4: option button to open the option menu and select the desired quality level. The T4 Force Squelch enables you to activate the T4 forced squelch. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
302/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
When the configuration of T0/T4 Configuration is completed, click on the OK push button to validate the choice and close the dialogue box. The Cancel push button cancels the configuration and closes the dialogue box.
Figure 229. Configuring the T0 or T4 SSM algorithm and the squelch criteria 18.2.6 SSU Configuration The SSU configuration command allows either to configure the single NE or the NE with SSU. In the last case the SSU quality has to be defined. Selecting SSU Configuration from the Synchronization menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
303/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 230. SSU Configuration 18.2.7 Remove Timing Reference Select the synch. Source to remove and click on the Remove Timing Reference option. To remove the selected source click on "OK" button of the confirmation message.
Figure 231. Synchronization source removing ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
304/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
To remove the selected source click on "OK" button of the confirmation message.
Figure 232. Synchronization source removing confirmation 18.2.8 Change T4 T5 This Menu allows the change of the synchronization physical interface from 2Mhz (T4) to 2 Mbit/s (T5) and vice versa This menu is enabling only if the SERGI board is present in the subrack Select Change T4 T5 from the Synchronization.
Figure 233. Change T4 T5 menu ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
305/388
A confirmation message appears
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 234. Change T4 T5 confirmation message Click on ok to confirm; the new window display T5 inserted of T4
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
306/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 235. Change T4 T5: command execution 18.2.9 Change 2MHz ->2Mbit This menu is enabled only if the operator selects a protection unit, which has as source a 2 MHz or a 2 Mbit/s without traffic Select Change 2MHz -> 2Mbit from the Synchronization
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
307/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 236. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit menu A confirmation message appears
Figure 237. Change 2MHz ->2Mbit confirmation message Click on ok to confirm The label of the protection unit will be changed depending on the kind of source selected: • •
ED
If the selected protection unit is a 2 MHz, then the label will be changed into 2Mbit/s. If the selected protection unit is a 2 Mbit/s, then the label will be changed into 2MHz
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
308/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 238. Change 2MHz -->2Mbit: command execution 18.2.10Set and Remove T0 Equal T4 To connect T0 internal synch. Select a synch. Source and click on Set T0 Equal T4 menu option. The connection between T0/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line as in the example of Figure below.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
309/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 239. T4 equal T0 setting To separate T4 from T0 click on the "Remove T0 Equal T4 " menu option. The T0/T4 connection will become shaped while the connection between T1/T4 will pass from a shaped to a continue line. 18.2.11Transmission of SSM Quality Configuration Select the T1 SDH Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Transmission SSM Quality Configuration is enabled. This selection allows, with the Inserted option, to transmit the
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
310/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
system internal T0 clock quality towards the external SDH interface. It is also possible to transmit different quality level selecting a different value. Click on Transmitted SSM Quality Configuration of the Synchronization menu option.
Figure 240. Transmission SSM Quality This Transmission SSM Quality window can be also opened from any SDH boards. Select the Equipment option of the View menu, then access the Board view> Port view> Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration; it is also possible to open the window selecting the Transmission option of the View menu, then access the Physical Media> SDH Tx Quality Configuration option. In both cases select the MST block 18.2.12Show Timing Source Selecting any T1 or T2 Reference Source in the Synchronization View hence the Show Timing Source is enabled. This selection allows analyzing the input source considering its payload structure and the related alarms (Port view is presented) . Click on Show Timing Source of the Synchronization menu option.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
311/388
Figure 241. Timing Source Example
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
312/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19 MS-SPRING MANAGEMENT 19.1 MS-SPRING intro duction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Different MS-SPRING protections architectures are provided: 2-Fiber (Terrestrial), and 4-Fiber NPE (Transoceanic). See ITU-T Rec. G.841. The description of the MS-SPRING protections is inserted in the Technical Handbook. 4 Fiber MS-SPRING is not operative in this release. 19.2 MS-SPRING connection configuration advices In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE advices are reported, to follow before to implement the MS-SPRing protection: there are some limitations concerning the aggregate types or the AU4s cross-connections to be considered. 19.2.1 2-Fiber MS-SPRING connection configuration advices The following suggestions must be considered in the MS-SPRING connection configuration: • •
• • •
SNCP, 4 Fiber MS-SPRING and Aggregate MSP protection connections cannot be installed in a 2 Fiber MS-SPRING network. This leads to an unprotected connections installation. AU4s from #9 to #16 don't have to be used for connections nor considered in any parameter of "Squelching table" provisioning. Only AU4s from #1 to 8# must be used and configured for path installation. AU4 permutation (change of AU4 allocation) is not allowed. The AU4 allocated to passthrough in HVC connections must be the same through the node. AU4 cross connection Aggregate side, i.e. paths received from the Aggregate line and looped-back to the (same) Aggregate line are not allowed. Follow the "Squelching Table Configuration" in order to define the "Squelching Table HO" for East and for West aggregates describing, for each connection installed, as Source Node, the Node Identifier of the node generating the considered AU4 and as Destination Node , the Node Identifier of the node terminating the AU4.
19.3 Operative sequence to configure MS-SPRING In the following paragraphs 2-Fiber and NPE operative sequence to follow during configuration are inserted. 19.3.1 Operative sequence to configure 2-Fiber MS-SPRING Next paragraphs lit the operative sequence according the type of produce to obtain. - Activation procedure a. Create an MS-SPRING schema with WTR, Node Identifier, Ring map and the related Squelching Table for each node of the ring, in the desired order. WTR Ring must be same in all the nodes. b. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "ACTIVATE" in each node of the ring, in the desired order. Consider that, in this step, "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> " Protocol
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
313/388
exception"), will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. c. Verify in the View Protection Status Parameter screen, at the end of the provisioning update, that all the nodes of the ring are in "MS-SPRing activate" and "No request" state.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
-
Deactivation procedure a. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRing management select "DEACTIVATE" in each node of the ring. Consider that, in this step, "Default K byte West or East" detection by View Protection Status Parameter (under MS-SPRing label -> "Protocol exception"), will occur on those Aggregate of the activated nodes connected to the nodes just deactivated. b. In the Main dialog for MS-SPRIng management select "DELETE" in each node of the ring.
-
Removing a node a. In the Manage ring Map view select the node and click on the "Remove Node" button b. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. c. Opening the View Protection Status Parameter screen, send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be removed. d. Physical remove the node e. Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the removed node.
-
Adding a node a. In the Manage ring Map view insert the node in the selected position. Next nodes are automatically shifted. b. Modify the table in the Configure Squelch Table view according the new Ring Map. c. Opening the View Protection Status screen, send "Force Ring" command to both NE's adjacent to the node to be added. d. Physical add the node and configure with 2-Fiber MS-SPRING activated with the right configuration (Ring Map, Squelching table, WTR, node Identifier). e. Connect the fibers and send the "Release" command of the relevant "Force Ring" to both NE's adjacent to the added node.
19.4 MS-SPRING Management In the NE current release the NE supports the MS-SPRING protection as "Terrestrial architecture". The Transoceanic application with 4-Fiber is not supported in current release. For the 2-Fiber Terrestrial application a max. of 16 nodes are available. The available tables permit to visualize for the same NE the architecture 2 x 2-Fiber. Figure below shows the MS–SPRing pull down menu.
Figure 242. Display MS–SPRing pull down menu
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
314/388
The first Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option contains all the commands to configure and manage the MS-SPRing. In any dialog box is present the Cancel or Close buttons. When the user clicks on these buttons the dialog box will close without starting any operation.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19.4.1 MS-SPRing Main Configuration Select the MS-SPRing pull down menu. Then select the Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management option from the pull down menu. The following dialogue box is displayed when no protection have been previously configured
Figure 243. MS-SPRing Management dialog box The only command available is Create. The name of Schema Selection in not editable but is fixed to "No Schema". Click on Create to start the MS-SPRing configuration. Figure below opens
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
315/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 244. Creation Schema dialog box The user can select the MS_SPRing Application and the Architecture types supported by the Network Element. Terrestrial MS-SPRing Application is a 2 Fiber architecture. Transoceanic MS-SPRing is a 4 Fiber architecture.(not supported in current relese) The "Port Selection" depends on the Architecture type: if the architecture is a 2F MS-SPRing, the working and protection port on each side is the same and the "Protecting West and East" fields are disabled (greyed). If the architecture is a 4F MS-SPRing, the working and protection ports on each side are different. The label r(xx)sr(y)sl(zz)port#(hh) where r=rack, sr=subrack, sl=slot give the position of the physical port. In the same board it is generally possible to have different port numbers. Only one port number (port#01) is available in the 1664SM Actually for 1664SM the working and protection aggregate boards have a fixed location in the subrack and the "Choose Port" buttons is not used. The OK button will start the selected operation. The cursor is displayed busy up to receiving a reply. Then the dialog window will be closed. Figure below opens and all commands are now available. The Holdoff Time command is not operative in current release.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
316/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 245. Activated MS-SPRing Management Click on Ring Map to configure the network node connection. Figure below opens
Figure 246. Node Id and associated ring node position The Ring Map sets the connection sequence of the nodes within the ring. The matrix represents up to 64 nodes for transoceanic application and up to 16 nodes for terrestrial application.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
317/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Select Current Nodeld (it means the NE where the operator is acting) in the box and enable Change Nodeld button (Id means Node Ident ifier) Select Available Nodeld in the pull down list (0 to 63 for transoceanic application, 0 to 15 for terrestrial application) releasing the left mouse button or pushing the stepper arrows and enter keys to select the Nodeld value. This will be displayed in the Available Nodeld box then click on Add Node button. Clicking on the Add Node button the selected "Ring position" will shift one step on the righ starting from "1" position and in the "Nodeld" field the Available Nodeld values is inserted. In the same time the Available Nodeld will be updated to a new value. The default association for a four node node ring related to the fourth node (Nodeld=3; Ring Position=4) is depicted in Figure below.
Figure 247. Ring map configuration Repeat the procedure for all nodes of the ring selecting the different NEs and edit the different Current Nodeld value. To remove a node, select the node and click on Remove Node button. The following Ring Position of the nodes on the right decreases by one and the erased Nodeld is inserted into Available Nodeld, so it can be assigned to other nodes. The OK button will start the selected operation, displaying the busy cursor up to receiving the replay to the actions. Then the dialog window will be closed. Click on the WTR Time button. Figure below opens
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
318/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 248. WTR dialog box Click on the push mouse button on the p/down Seconds arrows to select the required delay for the relevant WTR. The step value is 60 sec. The range value accepted is from 60 sec. to 900 sec. Click on OK to apply the WTR Configuration. WTR Time Span is used only for 4-fiber architecture; it is disable (grey) for 2 fiber architecture. The same WTR Time Ring must be set on each Node of the ring. 19.4.2 Squelching table with 2 fiber Terrestrial applications With a 2 fiber Terrestrial application can be selected the Squelching Table while with a 4 fiber Transoceanic application can be selected the Ring Traffic If the operator tries to select a different table a error message is visualized. Figure below shows the error message visualized when is selected the Ring Traffic with a Terrestrial application.
Figure 249. Example of error message Click on Squelching Table to configure the AU4 (Au4#1 to AU4#8 for 2F Architecture) connection between the different nodes. Figure below opens. The same opens clicking on Configure Squelch Table of the MS-SPRing pull down menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
319/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 250. Squelching table When the window is opened for the first time the squelching table is N/A (not available) because the NE has never been configured. Point the mouse on the matrix position and click on the right mouse button to open the node list menu. Select the node identification number (0 to 15) from the available list using the slider or the stepper arrows on the right scroll region. 19.4.2.1 Squelching table example
Figure 251. Example of a ring traffic The squelching table is applicable only for OH-VC signals.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
320/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 252. Connections of the ring
Figure 253. Squelching table of Node A, West side
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
321/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 254. Squelching table of Node A, East side
Figure 255. Squelching table of Node B, West side
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
322/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 256. Squelching table of Node B, East side
Figure 257. Squelching table of Node C, West side
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
323/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 258. Squelching table of Node C, East side
Figure 259. Squelching table of Node D, West side
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
324/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 260. Squelching table of Node D, East side 19.4.3 Activate, Deactivate and Delete commands The Main Activates commands manage the MS-SPRing configuration. The MS-SPRing status can be Enable, Active, Disable and Inactive. After having configured the protection schema by means of the Create button, the status becomes Enable. The Activate button selection set "in service" the MS-SPRing protection mechanism on the selected schema configuration. To change from Active to Enable click on the Deactivate button. This command starts the request to deactivate the MS-SPRing protection mechanism When the selected protection schema is Enable the Delete button starts the request to remove it. The delete action is started after confirming the window message.
Figure 261. Confirmation message During the activation procedure on different ADMs some of these can be Activate status, others in Inactivate status. The statuses, the protocol request and the protocol protection errors are described in next chapters describing the "MS-SPRing Protection Status and Commands". 19.5 MS-SPRING Protection Status and Commands for 2 fiber terrestrial application
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
325/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19.5.1 2F MS-SPRing protection commands If a protection schema is Active it is possible to select one of the above commands. Clicking on the Prot. Commands button in the MS-SPRing -> Main Dialog for MS-SPRing management Figure below is opened.
Figure 262. Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F) The working/protection span state boxes are not available (grey) for the 2Fibwer MS-SPRing architecture. In the MSPRing 2 Fiber configuration, the 1-8 working channels are inserted into the 9-16 protection channels in the opposite side of the failure event as shown in figure below.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
326/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 263. Ring Protection (2F) 19.5.2 External commands (2F) The external protection commands are: Lockout, Force, Manual, Exercise (not operative in current release). Manual. WTR. The lockout commands disable the MS-SPRing management. The lockout section present six lockout commands, four operative. Each lockout command is applicable on different points where the lockout actions has to be performed and any "Lockout" command is associated to a "Release" command to come back to the previous status. Term "Span" identifies the section interested by the command; it doesn't assume the Span meaning of the four-fiber protection.
Figure 264. Lockout commands (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
327/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 265. Protection and working channels where the lockout command can be activated (2F) The protection events can be equipment/signal failure, signal degrade or external command or a combination of them. The "Events" will be served if some actions (B/S=bridges and switches) are executed and the network has been updated. The "Events" will be signaled if the K1/K2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened, without execute actions. A single ring failure is completely restored but not two ring failures. When are present multiple ring failures the automatic B/S protection will try to maintain on all the possible connections. The K1/K2 communication protocol MS-SPRing is generated from the two nodes adjacent to "Event" via the protection communication channels. A node is defined tail-end when it firstly receives the "Event", the second node is defined head-end when it receives back the protocol answer. Figure below shows the association of tail end / tail end or head-end / tail end. Some network protection mechanisms are accepted or rejected depending on the type (tail/head) (lockout command.)
Figure 266. Tail-end / Head-end association If the node is tail end, the lockout working ring/span commands disable the protection MS-SPRing mechanisms, while if the node is head-end, it serves the request node protection. (Protection not disable). With the lockout protection span command and a ring failure, the ring protection is served if this ring failure occurred the same section; the ring protection is disable if this ring failure has occurred in another ring section. On the contrary, with the lockout working ring command failure and a ring failure along a different section, the ring protection is served (protection non disable)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
328/388
Figure 267. Tail-end / head-end protection with a lockout working and a one direction failure (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
329/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 268. Ring protection with a lockout and a ring failure (2F) Figure below shows a ring with three nodes and the actions performed by the lockout commands. This command disables the acknowledgment of the signal failure/degrade on the aggregate ports.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
330/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 269. Lockout command and non-served failures (2F) The Force command executes a forced protection. The Force Ring command substitutes the working channels (AU4 1 to 8) with the opposite direction protection channels (AU4 9 to 16) between two adjacent nodes. The Force Span command is not operative in " fiber MS-SPring.
Figure 270. Forced and Manual Commands (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
331/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 271. Manual and Force Span/Ring command (2F) The Manual command is similar to Force command but it is at a lower priority level with respect to automatic MS-SPRing. The general priority scale that can be applied to solve antithetical situations starting from the lowest priority level is: manual ring - automatic working ring force ring - lockout working ring - lockout protection span. When a force ring command is applied a next working failure is not able to modify the forced configuration applied. That is because force ring command has a higher priority respect to the "Automatic" working protection. In this condition the ring can be split according the location of command and event. Vice versa the "Manual" protection is exceeded by the "Automatic" protection. Figure below visualizes the ring protection with a Force/Manual command and a signal failure. FSR is for "Force Switching Request", SF-R is for "Signal Failure Request".
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
332/388
Figure 272. Ring Protection with Force and Manual commands (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
333/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 273. Automatic protection Bridge/Switch (2F) Each command starts when the proper button is selected. A dialog box has to be confirmed before the command is performed. From each command exists its own Release button to cancel the previously selected command and come back to normal MS-SPRing protection.
Figure 274. Example of confirmation dia log box Clicking on the WTR command next figure opens. If the WTR box, in the Local Condition field of Figure (Protection states and commands "Idle" status (2F)), becomes red a waiting time has been activated after repairing the ring failure. The waiting time, set in the configuration menu, can be cleared selecting the Clear WTR Ring command. A confirmation dialog box opens and, if the operator clicks OK, the WTR box turns off and the protection status window is updated.
Figure 275. Clear WTR command (2F) 19.5.3 2F MS-SPRing dual protection commands In general dual contemporary "Events" can be: Two external commands An external command and a ring/span failure Two contemporary ring/span failures
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
334/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Dual "Events" can appear on the same side W/W (West/West) or E/E (East/East)(SS= same side) or on the opposite side W/E or E/W (OS= opposite site) of the ring network. In the SS or OS the "Events" can appear on the same node (SN) or on the different nodes (DN), the different node can be an adjacent node (AN) or a remote node (RN). Figure below depicts a clockwise ring network. The network propagation K1-K2 protocol signals are according to the following legend: C
= served the column element
R
= served the row element
B
= served both row and column elements
Cs
= signaled (no served) the column element
Rs
= signaled (not served) the row element
Bs
= signaled (not served) both row and column elements
When a command (Manual switch, Force switch) is neither served nor signaled that is erased (it is not pending at the node)
Figure 276. Ring network reference scheme (2F) Figure up visualizes the ring reference scheme: the adjacent node (AN) is the node connected to the reference point. The automatic protection for dual ring failure is below. Consider the network reference scheme with a tail end / head-end alarm propagation. In this figure are depicted the node switches for any reported double events. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
335/388
Figure 277. Examples of Double ring failure
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
336/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 278. Automatic protection (tail/head) for double ring failure visualization Schemas are applied to describe dual generic "Events" where both ring failures and external commands are considered. The first row at the top of the protection table shows the "Events" at the reference pint. For each of them the associated "Events" is listed on the first column at the left of the table. Two manual ring commands can be only signaled: Bs (Manual SS-SN and OS-AN commands give the same ring protection switching and then both can be served). Two Lockout commands are both always served: B Force command has priority with respect to the Manual one. Automatic protection has priority with respect to the Manual command. Force Ring and Automatic Protection (or two Force ring commands) are always served if they are not applied on the SS-SN. In this last case has to be considered the priority level. The behavior is that seen for two automatic protection switching. Lockout working SS.SN has priority with respect to Manual or Automatic protection and Force commands. In the other cases. both commands are served (B). Lockout protection SS.SN/OS-AN and Manual or Automatic or Force command are both served because the switching SS.SN/OS.AN channels are not managed by the lockout protection: B. Lockout protection SS-AN/OS-SN overrides the Manual or Automatic or Force command because the lockout protection controls the switching channels of the same Node. Lockout protection SS-RN/OS-RN and manual or automatic or force command. the lockout protection preve nts the working 1-8 channels from being inserted into protecting 9-16 ones. The lockout protection is served, because it has a higher priority, the ring protection will be only signaled (pending)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
337/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 279. Tail / head dual "Events" Protection table (2F) 19.5.4 2F Protection Status Visualization The protection statuses ring networks are: - 1 - Lockout Switching - 2 - Forced Switching - 3 - Automatic Switching (MS-SPRing protection for equipment/signal failure). - 4 - Manual Switching - 5 - Idle (regular operation without MS-SPRing protection) These protection states are represented with the following color state boxes: - Green: Active State, No Request condition - Red: Inactive State and any external or protection executed command (that has been served). - Yellow: ordered but not executed command (that has only been signaled = pending status) - Grey: not available state box. Automatic switching and external commands are revertive: then when the "Events" have been cleared, the MS-SPRing configuration comes back to its status. The state boxes visualize the "Node Condition Request" as a consequence of the equipment/signal failure or the external commands detected on the corresponding side ("Event"). The state boxes don't describe the protection actions provided on the NEs. The served "Events" (B/S=bridges and switches are executed and the network has been updated) are completed B/S actions visualized as red box indications. The signaled "Events" (the k1/k2 protocol communicates to the network nodes what has happened) are pending B/S visualized as yellow box indications. Figure below shows the protection status with a served East manual ring command. Any protection status window is divided in different status fields: Schema description and status, Local Conditions, ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
338/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Node Conditions and Protocol Exceptions. The first one describes the ne twork configuration and application type and its status, the second gives the local external commands indications, the third the "Events" result on the nodes and the fourth one checks the k1/k2 ring protocol. The window is divided into three parts: West, Middle and East. On the West there are all the box indications corresponding to the West protections and commands. In the middle "WTR-Ring" refers to West and East sides, "No Request" corresponding to "Idle Status", and "Intermediate Node" denotes that the protections and commands don't concern the node involved. The Manual Ring command visualizes "Manual Ring" on the local node and "Request Node Ring" in the both "Local Conditions adjacent East ADM1-West ADM2 nodes, while the 3 and 4 nodes are "Intermediate Node". The red color means that the command has been served. A regular protocol "Exceptions" is represented with white boxes; a protocol alarm is signaled with red boxes. The "Prot. Unavailable" indications are activated when a lockout protection command is applied in a network node.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
339/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 280. Manual command applied at the "Reference Point" ring network Figure below reports the "Protection Status" for external "Force and Manual" commands in a 3 node ring (A, B, C). Figure below shows the lockout statuses and Figure below the automatic protection statuses.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
340/388
Figure 281. Visualization of the Forced / Manual protection Statuses (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
341/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 282. Visualization of the Lockout command Statuses (2F)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
342/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 283. Visualization of Automatic Protection Statuses (2F) The WTR status is visualized on the side where the link has been repaired. The considered network failures are related to a tail- end/head-end node connection. The "WTR Clear" command can be executed by the user without waiting the WTR setting time.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19.5.4.1 Double ring failure The double ring failure visualization of Figures (Example of Double ring failure) are here following reported.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
343/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 284. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point -SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-AN). The node 2 isolated, the nodes 2-3 in switching and the node 4 intermediate. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Request Node Ring" West ADM3-East ADM1: red (served) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM2: yellow (pending) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
344/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Intermediate Node" ADM4: red
Figure 285. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-SS-RN). The nodes 1,2,3,4 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both the two signal failures are served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
345/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Request Node Ring" East ADM3-Eas ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Request Node Ring" East ADM4-East ADM2: red (switching of the opposite nodes)
Figure 286. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN). The nodes 1,2 are being switched for signal failure alarm and both signal failures are served: B. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
346/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Active”: green "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red (switching for SF) "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red
Figure 287. Protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) recovering to "idle"
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
347/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure up reports the previous protection status with double ring failure (reference point-OS-AN) while the ring protection comes back to its "idle" status. The "WTR (Wait To Restore) Ring" on ADM1 node becomes red to signal that the SF disappears at the "reference point". The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "WTR Ring”: red (to signal the SF recovering) "Request Node Ring" West ADM2-East ADM1: red "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
348/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
19.5.4.2 Double external command or an external command and a ring failure
Figure 288. Double manual ring command (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up report the protection status with double manual command (reference point-SS-AN). Both the commands can be only pending. The "Request ring" to 1,2,3 nodes becomes pending while the 4 node is "Intermediate node". The box color is white unless otherwise specified. "Active": green ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
349/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM1 "Request Node Ring" East ADM2-West ADM3: yellow (pending) for Manual Ring East ADM2 "Request Node Ring" West ADM1-East ADM3: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red
Figure 289. Double manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
350/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure up reports the protection status with double manual command (reference point-OS-AN). Both the commands can be served. The "Request Manual ring" to ADM1 (East) and to ADM2 opposite side (West) collapses in the same manual command. Both the manual commands are served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3, ADM4: red
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
351/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 290. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-SN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-SN). Both the manual and the lockout commands are visualized to the same ADM1 node (East). Both the commands are served because the bridge/switch points are different. The box color is white unless otherwis e specified: "Active”: green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 - West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3, ADM4: red "Manual Ring and Lockout Prot." commands East ADM1: red "Prot. Unavailable" East ADM1: red. N.B. The "Prot. Unavailable" is not propagated on West ADM2 node because on West ADM2 the protection switching has been executed.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
352/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 291. Manual ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-SS-RN) Figure up reports the protection status with a manual command and a lockout protection (reference point-SS-RN). The manual command is pending while the lockout command is served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Manual Ring" commands East ADM1: yellow Request Node Ring" East ADM1 - West ADM2: yellow (pending) ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
353/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Request Node Ring" West ADM1 - East ADM2: yellow (pending) for switching of the opposite nodes "Lockout Prot." command: East ADM3: red "Prot. Unavailable" East ADM3 and West ADM4: red (served)
Figure 292. Automatic working ring and Manual Ring (reference point-OS-AN)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
354/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a manual ring command (reference point-OS-AN). The automatic protection has a higher priority with respect to the manual command and then it has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1-West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3-ADM4: red
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
355/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 293. Automatic working ring and Force Ring (reference point-SS-AN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a force ring command (reference point-SS-AN) The ADM2 is isolated and the force command is pending. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Request Node Ring" East ADM1: red (served) the West ADM1 switching is applied for SF "Request Node Ring" West ADM3: red (served) the East ADM3 switching is applied for the force command "Request Node Ring" West ADM2, East ADM2: yellow (pending) the ADM2 is isolated "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
356/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 294. Automatic working ring and Lockout working Ring (reference point-SS-SN) Figure up reports the protection status with a ring failure and a lockout working command (reference point-SS-SN). The lockout command has a higher with respect to the automatic protection switching and then only the lockout command has been served. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active”: green "Lockout Ring" commands East ADM1: red ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
357/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Request Node Ring" East ADM1 - West ADM2: red (served) "Intermediate Node" ADM3 - ADM4: red
Figure 295. Automatic working ring and Lockout Protection (reference point-OS-RN) The lockout protection has a higher priority with respect to the automatic ring protection. The box color is white unless otherwise specified: "Active": green ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
358/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
"Lockout Prot." commands West ADM3: red "Prot. Unavailable" West ADM3 - East ADM2: red (lockout protections served) "Request Node Ring" East ADM1 - West ADM2: yellow (automatic protection is pending) "Intermediate Node" ADM4: red
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
359/388
20 ISA/IP/ETH CONFIGURATION 20.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
This Chapter describes the operations necessary for the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards creation in the Equipment view and the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet TTPs creation; as a matter of fact ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet boards does not crate TTPs when they are configured. The ATM/Ethernet/PR_EA board creation is performed when CT users sets an ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board and then configure the IP Address. For the TTPs creation refer to paragraph 20.2 where all the operation are explained. For the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration (for example creation of Hard/Soft cross connection, PNNI configuration etc.) refers to the relevant OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK (ATM or PR_EA) where “Specific Terminal”application is explained in details. The operational sequence to follow to manage ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet cross–connection is: a) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board declaration (Equipment Set) b) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet IP Address Configuratio n (Called ISA board IP Address) c) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation (VC4XV, VC12XV, VC3XV, VC4–4c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) d) TTPs cross–connection. e) ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet traffic configuration with “Specific Terminal”application 20.2 ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet board TTPs creation In this paragraph will be explained how to create, delete and modify ATM/IP/ETH TTPs. 20.2.1 ATM boards On the ATM 4X4 board can be configured up to 16 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1TTP) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. On the ATM 8X8 board (present only on 1660SM) can be configured up to 32 TPs (VC4–4c TTP, VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP) with a maximum throughput of 1.2 Gbit/s. Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
360/388
Figure 296. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (initial empty fields)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
361/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 297. ATM 4X4 MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “create”a new port, “delete”an existing one and “change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the users want to create a new ATM port he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item”sections, he can fill the field ”Signal”choosing among the available options and push the” Create”button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ”Time Slot Sw.”button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ”Delete”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button. It is possible to see the ATM Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “Navigate”button.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
362/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 298. Navigate to ATM port view (example) 20.2.2 PR_EA boards On the PR_EA boards can be configured the following TPs: –PREA4ETH: up to 59 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. –PREA1GBE: up to 62 TPs (SDH VC4, SDH VC3, SDH VC12) with a maximum throughput of 622 Mbit/s. Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
363/388
Figure 299. PR_EA MATRIX (initial empty fields)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
364/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 300. PR_EA MATRIX (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “create”a new port, “delete”an existing one and “change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the users want to create a new PR_EA port he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item”sections, he can fill the field ”Signal”choosing among the available options and push the “Create”button. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the users want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ”Time Slot Sw.”button. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ”Delete”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button. It is possible to see the PR_EA Ports created as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “Navigate”button.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
365/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 301. MPLS port view example 20.2.3 10/100 Mbit/s fast ETHERNET board On the FAST ETHERNET boards can be configured up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, C12XV and VC3XV) on the port card (ETH–MB) and up 14 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, VC12XV and VC3XV) on the relevant access card (ETH–ATX). Select ISA/IP/ETH Configuration option from the Configuration menu to open the ATM/PR_EA/Ethernet ports Configuration.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
366/388
Figure 302. ETH–MB (initial empty fieds)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
367/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 303. ETH–MB (with defined TPs) The ATM/IP/Ethernet ports Configuration window is filled with notebook pages (initially blank), each page is an ATM, Ethernet or PR_EA board with relevant ports; The user can “create”a new port, “delete”an existing one and “change”port associations (that means modify the STM1 number and STM–1 Time Slot on ATM/IP/Ethernet ports already created) via the three buttons contained in the notebook page. When the user want to create a new TPs he can select an empty row, then in the “Selected Item” sections, he can fill the field ”Signal”choosing among the available options and push the”Create” button. Note: in case of concatenated VC TP creation (example VC12XV or VC3XV), before to push on ”Create”button it is also necessary to choose the Concatenation Level value; after creation command new fields and a new button appear. The STM1 Number and the STM1 Time Slot are automatically assigned. If the user want to change the port attribute association he can select a filled row, then in the “Selected Item”section he can change the fields ”STM1 number”and ”STM1 Time Slot”and than push the ”Time Slot Sw.”button. The Ctrl Path Act. button allows to change the state of the concatenated virtual VCs (example VC12XV or VC3XV) that could be “Idle”or “active”.; Click on Ctrl Path Act. button a new ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
368/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
window will be opened. To delete a port the user can select a row and push ”Delete”button. To close the dialog box click on the “Close” push button.
Figure 304. Control Path activation window (example) It is possible to see the VCs created on the ETHERNET board as above explained by selecting the relevant row in the ATM/IP/Ethernet configuration window and then click on the “Navigate” button.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
369/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 305. ETHERNET port view example 20.2.4 Gigabit/s ETHERNET board Three architectures are possible to provide Gigabit Ethernet ports: [1] 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet board (ETH–MB)+GBIT Access (GETH–AG). With this architecture can be configured up to 2 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type concatenation level=1) on the GETH–AG access card and up to 11 TPs (VC4 TTP, VC3 TTP, VC12 TTP, s31 TTP, E1 TTP Type) on the ETH–MB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
370/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
[2] GIGABIT board (GETHMB) stand–alone. With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on each board taking into account that the maximum throughput must not exceed 622 Mbit/s (for example it is possible to configure 1 port VC4XV with a max. concatenation level equal to 4 or as alternative 4 ports VC4XV with concatenation level equal to 1). The same rules above described are applicable to 1662SMC when the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in normal slot (i.e. slot with a throughput of 622 Mbit/s). In 1662SMC are also available slot called “enhanced” (25, 26,28,29,34,35,37,38) where the throughput per board is 1.2 Gbit/s. If the GIGABIT board (GETHMB) is equipped in one of these slots it is possible to reach a max concatenation level equal to 7 per port. Of course this means that there is only one VC4XV with concatenation level =1 available for another port and no resources for the last two ports present on the board. For more details read the Gigabit Ethernet description reported in the Technical Handbook. [3] GIGABIT board (GETH–MB) + GBIT Access (GETH–AG). With this architecture can be configured up to 4 TPs (VC4XV Type) on the GETH–AG access card and up to 4 TPs (VC4XV TTP Type) on the GETH–MB main board taking into account that the maximum throughput for the “couple”must not exceed 1.2 Gbit/s.; the concatenation level per port can be from 1 to 7. In order to support this architecture the GETH–MB board must be equipped in the “enhanced”slot (25,26,28,29,34,35,37,38) and GETH–AG access in the associated slot (respectively 3,4,6,7,15,16,18,19). The Gigabit Ethernet TPs creation follows the same rules described for the 10/100Mbit/s Ethernet Board. 20.2.5 ES1-8FE boards The Alcatel Reference ISA-ES NE can integrate: ·Local Ethernet Interface __ 8 local Ethernet 10/100 BaseT interface; ·Remote Ethernet interface __ Remote Ethernet 10/100 interface mapped into a single VC12, VC3, VC4, VC12 nv[n=1..63], VC3-nv [n=1.3]; __ Remote Gigabit Ethernet interface mapped into a SDH VC4.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
371/388
Figure 306. ES1-8FE MATRIX (initial empty fields)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
372/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 307. ES1-8FE MATRIX (with defined TPs)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
373/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 308. Navigate to ETH port view (example)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
374/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
21 Software Management
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
21.1 Generalities and descriptions The Craft Terminal provides a set of functions, which allow software packages manipulatio n within NEs. The downloading operation consists in the establishment of session between the NE and a software server for the purpose of file transfer. Actions can then be performed on the NE software version as update and activation operation, or roll back to the previous software version operation. In this way the NE can follow the product evolution with "in service" equipment. The same function is used during maintenance phase, to update spare boards for substitution after troubleshooting. The operations that can be undertaken in this section are: • • •
Display Software Download Information, Initiate / Abort Software Package Download, Manage Software Packages within NEs, activating the downloaded Software Package or coming back to the previous condition.
A backup/restore can be also done on the MIB of the NE. Indeed the MIB can be saved to or restored from the mass storage of the Craft Terminal. The software download general principle is represented in the following figure.
Figure 309. Software Download general principle 21.1.1 Naming Conventions The naming conventions used for Download Management are the following:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
375/388
•
Software Package: Software Package stands for a piece of software, which can be executed by an NE of a particular type. It consists in one or more Software Units and a Descriptor File. A software package is identified by its name, release, version and edition.
On the NE (i.e. once downloaded) a software package can be: - The active version: the software package currently running on the NE - A standby version: a software package, which is neither the active version nor the boot version
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
•
•
Software Unit: A Software Unit is a part of a software package, which can be either executable code, or a data segment of a particular board within an NE. A software unit is also identified by its name, release, version and edition. Descriptor File: A Descriptor File contains information about the software package it belongs to and lists the composing software units. Each software package must have a descriptor file otherwise it would not be possible to interpret the content of the package. Software Management Function: The Software management function offers information about all current software packages present in an NE. Indicators enable software management (running package, activated package, etc...).
The following software version states are available: • •
Commit (active) version: the software version currently running on the NE. Standby version: is a software version which has been downloaded on the NE but which is not in the active state.
Two main functions are involved in the software downloading: - Software Download Manager function - Software Download Server function The Software Download Manager function takes the downloading and management requests of the operator and sends them to the NE. Thus, this function enables a download process to be initiated and monitored by the operator. It manages the NE software releases and initiates software download operations. The Software Download Server is only responsible for fulfilling the requests received from NEs and performing software package file transfer operations to the NE. 21.2 Software download operative sequence Two main different operative condition are defined for this Equipment: First installation of a 1662SMC The NE is received without the relevant software install. The software download must be done As described in the SIBDL section of this Handbook. Updating a 1662SMC with already installed software. Follow the operative indic ations. 21.2.1 Software Download upgrade N.B. In order to migrate from Release 1.1A to a Higher Release, the download procedure requires Two steps. The first is from 1.1A to 1.1X (intermediate package) and the second is from 1.1X To the Higher Release (e.g. 1.1B1). In order to update the following procedure is to be done as explained in the next steps: a) Install the CD ROM with the NE Software Package on the PC.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
376/388
b) Open a session on Craft Terminal application (start-up of the application, start supervision and NE login) c) Check the present status of the software on a selected NE.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Download should not be performed in presence of unstable alarms d) Open the Download menu. e) Select the new software package in the server and triggers the download process, A message will indicate the completed download. f) Activate the package as presented at para.20.5 on page 333. g) Check that the activated package is in the “Commit”status. h) If problems are found with the new activated package, activate the previous software package (Revert--back operation) to come back to the previous condition and then try to repeat the procedure. 21.2.2 NE Software package installation procedure The following procedure allows the NE software package installation. According to the customer Requirement two types of installation are possible: [1] If only SDH software package installation is required follow the instruction from point a) to point e) and than download the software package SDH (example 662SMC 2.1B.09) from the EML— USM (refer to paragraph 20.4 for details). [2] If SDH+”Specific Software”package installation is required follow the instruction from point a ) to point o ). In the example that follows will be described the ATM specific software installation; following the same rule will be possible to install also the IP specific software. Procedure a) Install from CD ROM the NE Software Package on the Personal Computer, as explained in the “1320CT Basic Operator Handbook”. b) Run the 1320CT V.x platform c) From Network Element Synthesis (NES) choose the Software Administration option of the Supervision --> File Administration menu.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
377/388
Figure 310. Software Administration menu
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
After the selection Figure below. Will be opened.
Figure 311. Software Package Administration view d) Select the tag e) Press the button to install the relevant software package In the window that opens select the directory where the NE software package file has been installed (Typically is Alcatel/usm/ect/swdw///) and execute.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
378/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 312. SDH software package installation f) Insert the ATM CD ROM in the computer g) Select the tag h) Press the button to install the ATM software package present on the ATM CD ROM In the window that opens select the directory where the ATM software package file has been installed (typically is /ect/swdw///) and execute.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
379/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 313. ATM software package installation (example) i) Select the tag j) Select the SDH software package base onto which ATM software package has to be merged k) Press to launch the software merging process and create the SDH+ATM Software package The New Software package will be created.
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
380/388
Figure 314. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part A)
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
381/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 315. OMSN enhanced software package creation (part B) The originated “Enhanced”software package has a new label as follows: OMSN name = is the SDH name + “E”letter OMSN version = is the SDH version Example: Starting from SDH SWP 662SMC ver. 3.xy.wz will be created the OMSN SWP 662SMCE ver. 3.xy.wz l) Select the tag. m) Select the previously created software package (example 662SMCE 3.1.08) n) Select the ATM software package (in the right view) (example ATM 1.01.07) o) Press the button
Figure 316. Enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) It is now possible to download the enhanced software package (SDH + ATM) from the EML-USM (Refer to paragraph 20.4 for details). 21.3 Software Download Manager menu
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
382/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All the software download operations are carried out from the software download manager.
Figure 317. Equipment view To display the software download manager menu from the main view, select the NE on which you want to perform download operations, then select the Download pull down menu. The following menu is displayed:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
383/388
Figure 318. Download menu
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
21.4 Init download You can request the NE to start / abort a software download operation. After selecting the desired NE you must choose an available software package and then start the download process. All these operations can be performed from the SW downloading dialogue box. Select the Init download option from the Download cascading menu. The Software download initiate dialogue box is opened.
Figure 319. SW Downloading dialogue box example The following fields are available to search a specific package: • •
Server filter: to enter the server name selected, Package filter: to enter the package name selected.
To use the filter and display the selection, push on Apply filter(s) button. The SW packages existing on the Craft Terminal are displayed. In the next field the list of the packages is displayed: • • •
Server: name of the server, Package: name of the package, Version: version number of package.
Click on Forced push button to set the forced download attribute: then all software units of the Descriptor file have to be downloaded. Otherwise only the units with different software version will be loaded. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
384/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
If you want stop the download, click on the Cancel push button of the Software download initiate dialogue box to close it. Click on the OK push button to start the download. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the download. If you confirm the operation, the SW Downloading dialogue box then disappears and the Software download in Progress dialogue box is displayed from which you can if necessary abort the software download. You can monitor the download progress by means of the Software in Progress dialogue box, which also enables you to possibly abort the current download.
Figure 320. Software download in progress (example) The Software download in Progress dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE and the SW package name, the total of bytes, the current percentage and the current file, which is being downloaded. Click on the Abort push button to abort the complete download transaction. From the confirmation dialogue box that opens you can confirm or cancel the abort. Click on the Close push button to close the SWDL Work in Progress dialogue box at the end of the software download. 21.5 SW package Activation and Units information This item permits to activate the downloaded software package and to get information about the software of the various units of the equipment. The operator is able to get information about the software package of the NE at any moment, even if no download operations have been performed previously. For this, select the Units info option from the Download pull down menu. The following dialogue box is opened. ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
385/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 321. Software Package Information dialogue box (example) The SW Information dialogue box displays the name and type of the NE, and the respective package name and status of the committed and (if existing) the uncommitted software. You can select one software package by clicking on the name. The following fields are displayed: • • • • • •
Software package: name, release, version, edition of the package, Service Specific Components: name, release, version, edition of the Service Specific Components (example ATM, IP etc.) Operational state: enabled or disabled, Activation date: date and hour of the last activation Vendor: the supplier of the product, Current state\Action: commit or stand-by and with the option button; none/Force/Activate/Delete Current state = standby means the package is not active on the NE Current state = commit means the package is active on the NE Action = (none) means no action to do Action = activate serves to activate the selected SW package
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
386/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Action = force (item not operative) Select the Activate option of the "Current State\Action" field, to activate the Software package The Sw units Det. button allows giving more information about a selected software package. Clicking on it, the following window is displayed:
Figure 322. Detail software package (example) Clicking on [-] symbol behind each software package all details disappear. When you click on Close the previous view is displayed In when you click on the: • • •
OK push button you close dialogue box, Cancel push button you close the SW Information dialogue box, Help push button you access to help on context.
21.6 Mib management This function allows to make a backup and/or a restore of the Mib.. (MIB is a data base pertaining the configuration of the equipment). Select the Mib management option from the Download pull down menu. The following window is displayed:
ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
387/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 323. NE MIB management The following fields are displayed: • •
Available backups on local server: gives the list of the backups available on the Craft Terminal, Backup name: to enter the new backup name.
Three push buttons allow choosing the action with click on: • •
•
Backup: performs the backup on the CT of the Mib present on the NE, Restore: this function allows the managing system to restore the NE configuration database of the managed system. Only one restore operation can be performed at the same time on a given NE. Delete: this action allows deleting a backup of the NE database. The NE is not involved in this action. The only effect is to delete the selected backup version stored in a specific directory of the FT server.
To activate an already restored MIB you click on Activate push button. Only at this point it becomes operative on the NE. To exit of the NE MIB management window, you click on Close push button. To save or load the Mib to/from an external disk follow the indication of the "Basic 1320CT Operator's Handbook" using the menu options of the Network Element Synthesis.
END OF DOCUMENT ED
01
SC.3: NE MANAGEMENT
3AL 98104 ADAA
388/388
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 NE Maintenance
01
2004-04-21
Creation
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
Distribution: Internal
ED
01
External
Ma Jing APPROVED BY
PREPARED BY
√
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
1/44
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .................................................................. 3 1
INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................... 4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................... 4 1.1.1 Document scope ............................................................................................................... 4 1.1.2 Target audience................................................................................................................ 4 1.2 TERMINOLOGY ...................................................................................................................... 4 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations............................................................................................ 4 1.2.2 Glossary of terms............................................................................................................. 4 2
MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 5 2.1
3
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 5
MAINTENANCE OF THE PC................................................................................................. 6 3.1
4
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 6
PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL ............................................................................. 7 4.1
5
PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................ 7
CORRECTIVE MAINTENAN CE (TROUBLESHOOTING) .............................................. 8 5.1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................ 8 5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ORGANIZATION ..................................................................................... 8 5.3 ON SITE TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................... 10 5.4 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF THE CRAFT TERMINAL. ................................................. 12 5.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions........................................................................... 13 5.4.2 Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view) .......................................................... 15 5.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication ............................................................................................. 16 5.4.4 Alarm Surveillance (AS)................................................................................................. 18 5.4.5 Port View alarms ........................................................................................................... 22 5.4.6 Board view alarms and states ........................................................................................ 25 5.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms...................................................................................... 28 5.4.8 Fans Subrack alarms view............................................................................................. 30 5.4.9 Equipment View alarms................................................................................................. 31 5.4.10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) .................................................................... 33
6
UNIT REPLACEMENT WITH A SPARE ........................................................................... 34 6.1 6.2 6.3
7
COMPACT ADM UNIT REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. 34 ATM MATRIX 4X4 UNIT REPLACEMENT .......................................................................... 38 IP MATRIX UNIT REPLACEMENT ....................................................................................... 39
UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE........................................................................... 40 7.1 7.2
ED
SYNTH SUBSTITUTION WITH SYNTHN ............................................................................ 40 P4S1, S-41, L-41, L-42 SUBSTITUTION WITH P4S1N, S-41N, L-41N, L-42N ................... 44
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
2/44
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
FIGURES Figure 1. General Flow-chart for on site troubleshooting.................................................................. 11 Figure 2. Power supply alarm ............................................................................................................ 12 Figure 3. Transmission network level structure................................................................................. 14 Figure 4. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view)............................................................... 15 Figure 5. Alarm pull down menu....................................................................................................... 18 Figure 6. Alarm Surveillance ............................................................................................................. 19 Figure 7. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema) ................................................... 23 Figure 8. Example of ATM Port View alarms................................................................................... 24 Figure 9. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms .............................................................................. 25 Figure 10. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status .............................................................. 27 Figure 11. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status .............................................................. 28 Figure 12. Example of Subrack view alarms and status .................................................................... 29 Figure 13. Example of Rack view alarm and status ........................................................................... 30 Figure 14. Fans subrack alarms view................................................................................................. 31 Figure 15. Example of Equipment View alarms and status ............................................................... 32 Figure 16. Example of External Points alarms and status ................................................................. 33 Figure 17. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected) ...................................................... 36 Figure 18. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected) ................................................ 37 Figure 19. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection ...................................... 38 Figure 20. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection............................................ 39 Figure 21. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected ....................................................... 41 Figure 22. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected ............................................................. 43
TABLES Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association............................................................................... 16 Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication.................................................................................................. 16 Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication.................................................................................... 17 Table 4. Management States Control Panel. ...................................................................................... 17 Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description........................................................... 20 Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions ................................. 20
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
3/44
1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1
INTRODUCTION Scope
1.1.1 Document scope The aim of this document is to help the operator understand, configure and manipulate Network Elements (NEs) easily, using the Craft Terminal (CT). The different functionalities related to the equip ment views, the menu items and the different actions that can be undertaken from these views are described in detail. 1.1.2 Target audience This document is intended for the operators whose role is to manage the Network Elements. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: --- 1320CT Basic Operator’ s Handbook The documents of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are: --- Introduction manual 1.2
Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. 1.2.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
4/44
2
MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION
2.1
Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The maintenance procedures consist of the following steps: • • • •
ED
Maintenance of the PC. Problems with Craft terminal (shut-down and restart of the PC). Corrective Maintenance (Troubleshooting). Unit replacement with a spare.
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
5/44
3 3.1
MAINTENANCE OF THE PC Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
With regard to maintenance PC, refer to the constructor's documentation.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
6/44
4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
4.1
Problems with Craft Terminal Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes the Shutdown and restarts the PC should the Craft Terminal Software Product not be working properly or not responding to the operator's commands. In order to shut down the PC execute the command: start>shut down A window (Windows NT Security user dialog) is displayed. It permits to shut down the computer or restart it. The same window is displayed pressing he keys + + simultaneously.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
7/44
5
Corrective Maintenance (troubleshooting)
5.1
Purpose of the procedure
Troubleshooting involves the detection, location and correction of failures in the equipment and the replacement of the defective parts.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.2
Troubleshooting organization
The troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the help of some flow-charts and tables, reported hereinafter. Anyway this method does not deal with the following aspects (which are to be deduced in other ways): • •
Faulty electronic alarm indication, processing and detection circuits Faulty wiring (back-panel, connectors, etc.)
The following interfaces are present to troubleshoot the equipment: • • • •
Q3 interface for Telecommunication Management Network F interface for Craft Terminal (Local or Remote) Remote Alarm for Supervisory Center LEDs on the units of the NE
Usually maintenance is firstly done via software (TMN or Re mote Craft Terminal) to locate the faulty equipment and the faulty unit or the faulty path and then on site to physically solve the trouble. The Maintenance can be done: • • • •
From a TMN network management center From a Remote Craft Terminal (RCT) management center From a station supervisory center On site
TMN network management center: by means of the TMN the maintenance technician can see the alarms sent by each equipment of the managed network (see the relevant TMN handbooks). Remote craft terminal: the operator, connected to a local NE, can remotely manage and troubleshooting a network composed of max 32 NEs included itself. This handbook is used. Station supervisory center: the maintenance technician refers to the Remote Alarms received from the equip ment in a centralized office of the station i.e.: • • •
T URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL), T NOT URGENT (MINOR): remote alarms pertaining to the urgent, not urgent alarm type. TOR, TAND: remote alarms respectively due to the decrease or loss of one or both station power supply DC voltages. INT: Remote alarm pertaining to the local (internal) alarm type
When a second CONGI unit is used the following remote alarms are added:
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
8/44
• •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• •
TORC, TANC: remote alarms respectively due to the loss of +3,3V generated by the on board converter in of one or both the CONGI units. IND: Indeterminate alarm synthesis. Indicates synthesis of alarms not associated to others severities. Not operative. TUP: remote alarm due to microprocessor fault in the COMPACT ADM unit LOSQ2: remote alarm due to loss of communication with Mediation Device. Not operative.
Depending on the supervisory center organization, it is possible to locate the equipment in troubles and to detect the failure type and source. On site: the operator is on site in case: 1) The equipment is not managed by a TMN or by a Remote Craft terminal (RCT) 2) The equipment is not reachable by the remote manager (TMN or RCT) and is therefore isolated 3) Link problems are present 4) The trouble has been located and a substitution is necessary In case 1), 2), 3), the alarmed equipment is checked by means of the local Craft Terminal and of rack LED indications and station buzzers. The NE is provided with LEDs, which indicate: Units Alarms : Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor LED (green/red) on the front cover plate. This LED indicates: • •
When red, internal failure (indicates that the unit concerned must be replaced) When green, in service unit
Centralized Equipment Alarms : All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the COMPACT ADM unit which will deliver centralized optical indications (by means of LEDs on its front cover plate). Specifically, from the top to the bottom: • • • • •
Red LED: detection of an urgent (MAJOR and CRITICAL) alarm Red LED: detection of a not urgent (MINOR) alarm Yellow LED: alarm condition ATTENDED Yellow LED: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS Yellow LED: detection of an indication (WARNING) alarm
The analysis of these LEDs permits to detect the alarm type (Urgent - Not Urgent - Indication) and relevant condition (Abnormal condition, Attended). In case of urgent or not urgent alarm, after having located the alarmed equipment, the alarm condition can be "attended" by pressing the relevant alarm storing push button on the COMPACT ADM unit. This condition causes: •
•
ED
On the rack o The YELLOW LED to light up o The RED LED to go off On the front cover plate: o Yellow LED (ATTENDED) to light up 01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
9/44
o
Red LEDs NOT URGENT (MINOR) and URGENT (MAJOR and CRITICAL) to turn off (free to accept other alarms)
If both LEDs are on, the Attend command should be given twice: one for attending the NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm and one for attending the URGENT (MAJOR) alarm. 5.3
On site Troubleshooting
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The trouble-shooting operation proceeds according to the information indicated in the flow-charts: • •
Figure 1.: General flow-chart Figure 2.: Power supply alarm
As indicated in the flow-charts the troubleshooting operation is done by means of the Craft Terminal, and of the optical indicators (LEDs) present on the NE. The Craft Terminal is cord-connected to the relative connector on the COMPACT ADM unit front cover plate (F interface). The Craft Terminal applications provide detailed information on the alarm state thus facilitating fault location and subsequent removal.
To correctly execute the troubleshooting operations the technician must know the exact equipment configuration (see Equipment Configuration applications on the Craft Terminal). The aim of the flow-charts which follow and of the ma intenance tables is to locate the faulty unit and to replace it with a spare as well as to locate a failure along the link. The flow-charts/tables should be also consulted when the unit LEDs flash, because the flashing condition might be due to external alarm causes usually related to line problems.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
10/44
Figure 1. General Flow-chart for on site troubleshooting
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
11/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
WARNING! Before removing CONGI unit from subrack, switch-off the relevant Station Battery Fuse Breaker present at the top of the Rack or in the Station Distribution Frame; subsequently remove the station battery cable if necessary and then extract the CONGI unit.
Figure 2. Power supply alarm
N.B. IF THE REMOTE ALARMS ARE NOT UTILIZED CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF STATION POWER SUPPLY. SHOULD IT HAVE FAILED THEN ALL THE UNIT’S LEDS WILL BE OFF (FOLLOW OUTPUT “YES”OF THE FLOW-CHART). IF POWER SUPPLY IS PRESENT PROCEDE WITH OUTPUT “NO”. 5.4
Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal.
The troubleshoot proceeds checking the detailed information on the NE alarm by means of the craft terminal. The information on the NE alarm will be mainly obtained by means of the craft terminal through the Alarm Surveillance data and the alarms/status indications presented in the various views, depending on the level of the structure under observation. Navigation across the various level views is done from higher to lower levels, by double clicking on the objects (see instructions on "NE management" section). ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
12/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The NE hierarchy is organized in the following order: NE > rack > subrack > board > port > TP. The troubleshoot procedure with the Craft Terminal consists of the following steps: a) The alarms/status view organization for the equipment is shown in Figure 2.. Observe the active alarms on the Severity Alarm Synthesis, Domain Alarm Synthesis and Management States Control Panel always present on the window (it resumes all the NE alarms). Table 3. Describes the meaning of these alarms/statuses and the relevant maintenance actions. b) In case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance to troubleshoot. This application gives the details of the detected alarms and helps for their localization. Para 1.1.4 describes this view. c) It is possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following the indication of Para 1.1.5. d) It is also possible to check alarm and status at Board view; Subrack view and Equipment view are also supplied following the indication of Para 1.1.6 and Para 1.1.8. e) Eventual housekeeping alarms can be localized following the indications given in Para. 1.1.9. f) These above said paragraphs describe general aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applicatio ns. g) The history of past events can be obtained by means of the Event log option of the Diagnosis pull down menu (see "NE management" section). Troubleshooting with Automatic Laser Shutdown The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is used to protect the operator who is working with the optical fiber. When the ALS is active, it may be difficult to detect the link failed. To locate it, it is necessary to "force on" the ALS, thus enabling the optical power transmission on the opposite direction of the failed link. WARNING: During this phase the operator has to pay attention when working with fibers and connectors. The ABNORMAL indication informs the operator of the ALS forced condition. After having completed the maintenance, enable the ALS. The ALS states are indicated in the port view. 5.4.1 Preliminary Concepts and Definitions The following concepts and definitions are considered useful to facilitate maintenance operations with the aid of the previously indicated tables. The various units specified in the synchronous multiplexing hierarchy imply structuring the Transmission network into three levels (sublevels of the physical OSI level): •
•
ED
Transmission bearer level. It is the support for the path level and can be further split into physical level (Transmission media) and Transmission section level. The sections can be either regenerator or multiplexer and utilized for specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The interface alarms (or section alarms, indicated in the tables) belong to this level (example: Line LOS, LOS, B2etc.). Path level It concerns the data transfer between the access points and the path. It does not depend on the service or on the type of Transmission media. It constitutes the circuit level support. The path can be either lower order (LO) or higher order (HO) depending on the capacity of data transferring. Like the regenerator and multiplexer sections, the paths too have specific functions associated to the EOW channels of the SDH frame. The alarms listed
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
13/44
•
in the cited tables, where path level troubleshooting is required, belong to this level (example: TUAIS, TU LOP). Circuit level. This level concerns the transfer of information between the access points and the circuit proper. It is a direct support for the telecommunication services. It superimposes the SDH function and is considered as the transport agent hence no SDH order-wire channel associated functions are required. An example of this level alarm is Tributary LOS.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The above level structuring in the Transmission network is depicted in Figure 3.
Figure 3. Transmission network level structure
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
14/44
Alarms/states view Organization (subrack view)
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.4.2
Figure 4. Alarms/status view Organization (subrack view)
The critical (CRI) or major (MAJ) alarms indicate severe alarms that could have impact on the current traffic (interruption or degrade). Thus requiring a rapid intervention to restore the regular working condition of the equipment. A message under the mouse facility provides the alarm or status complete denomination. A message appears in the message area in the bottom left corner of the view.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
15/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.4.3 Alarm synthesis indication Alarms and Statuses synthesis are given in all the screens. The alarms CRI, MAJ, MIN, WNG, IND are part of the Severity Alarms Synthesis area, presented in Table 3. The alarms EXTP, EQP, TRNS are part of the Domain Alarms Synthesis area, presented in Table 4. The alarms SUP, LAC, COM, OS, MGR, NTP and AC are part of the Management States Control Panel, presented in Table 5. All these indications (except for SUP, LAC, COM, OS, MGR, and NTP) are the summaries of particular types of alarms detected by the equipment, hence the specific cause of alarm is to be found as indicated in the following paragraphs: 1.1.4, 1.1.5, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.1.9. Table 1. Reports the association between the colors of the Alarms and their Severity. For the Domain Alarms Synthesis the color corresponds to the highest severity among the set of the active alarms for the relevant domain, according to the same rules of previous Tableau 1. Tableau 2. Reports the colors of the Management States Control Panel when not in "normal" condition. Table 1. Alarms colors and Severity association
Alarm Color Severity RED CRITICAL ORANGE MAJOR YELLOW MINOR CYAN WARNING WHITE INDETERMINATE GREEN NO ALARM
Table 2. Alarm Synthesis indication
Mnemonic CRI
Maintenance
Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleShooting (typical: NE isolation). NB1. See detailed indication in the following Para. Major (Urgent) alarm Synthesis of alarms that needs immediate troubleshooting. NB1. See detailed indication in the following Para. Minor (Not urgent) Synthesis of alarms for which a delayed alarm troubleshooting can be defined. NB1. See detailed indicatio n in the following Para. Warning alarm Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the network. NB1. See detailed indication in the following Para. Indeterminate alarm Synthesis of alarms not associated to the previous Severities. Not operative. See detailed indication in the following Para.
MAJ
MIN
WNG
IND
ED
Alarm/Status Description Critical alarm
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
16/44
Table 3. Domain Alarm Synthesis indication
Mnemonic EXTP
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
SYNC
EQP TRNS
Alarm/Status Maintenance Description External Point Check the relevant station alarm associated to the (Housekeeping alarm) Input housekeeping indication. See detailed indication in the following Para. Synchronization alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Synchronization domain. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. Equipment alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain. See unit detailed indication in the following Para. Transmission alarm Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain. See unit detailed indication in the following Para.
Table 4. Management States Control Panel.
Mnemonic SUP
Description Supervision state
Local Access State
COM
NE GREEN: Identifies the “Enable”operational unreachable/unreachable state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link up) RED: Identifies the “Disable”operational state of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal (SDH service link down)
OS
Operational System Isolation
MGR
Manager level
NTP
ED
Maintenance GREEN: NE is under supervision. BROWN: NE is not under supervision. Used in the OS. GREEN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the OS permission to manage the NE (granted). CYAN: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).
GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1353SH CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is managed by the 1353SH. GREEN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1354RM CYAN: Indicates that the N.E. is not managed by the 1354RM
Network Time Protocol GREEN: NTP protocol enabled and both NTP servers (main and spare) are unreachable. BROWN: NTP protocol disabled. CYAN: NTP protocol enabled and at least one NTP servers (main or spare) are reachable.
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
17/44
AC
GREEN: normal operating condition. CYAN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks, forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS NB1: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile can modify the assignment of each alarm root to the various syntheses.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.4.4 •
Abnormal Condition
Alarm Surveillance (AS) In case of alarm presence, access the Alarm Surveillance (AS) to troubleshoot. For this purpose select the Diagnosis pull down menu. With the Alarm pull down menu (see Figure 3.). It is possible to show all the NE Alarms or filter the alarms report, for example displaying only the alarms of a specific domain (i.e. only alarms of the Equipment domain).
Figure 5. Alarm pull down menu
After the selection a list with a synthesis of the Alarm Surveillance is presented and immediately after also the detailed list of the Alarm Surveillance (see Figure 6.). In the synthesis list it is possible to filter the data to show with the detailed view, double clicking on the selected row of the sublist of Figure 6.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
18/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 6. Alarm Surveillance
Detailed information of each alarm is supplied. The alarms scenario is indicated by the colors of the alarms and by the information displayed in the table. For instance, if an alarm is still active, the whole row has the same color of its relevant "Perceived Severity"; else if it has been cleared, the color of the row is green (except the "Perceived Severity"). The same information is reported in the "Clearing Status" column. ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
19/44
In the following are shortly described the main information obtained in the AS view, starting from the left column:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Table 5. Alarm Surveillance information general description
TITLE DESCRIPTION - Perceived Severity The severity assigned to the alarm is indicated, with the relevant color, i.e.: MAJOR, MINOR, WARNING - Event date and time Indicates year, month, day and hour of the alarm. - Friendly Name Identify the rack, subrack, board, port, and TP in which the alarm is detected, i.e.: / r01sr1sl09/#port01-CE1S - Event Type Indicates the family type of the alarm as subdivided in the ASAP list, i.e.: EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION, - Probable Cause The fault/problem is indicated, i.e.: loss of signal, transmitter degraded, replaceable unit missing, resource isolation, ... - Reservation Status Indicates if the alarm is reserved (RSV) or not (NRSV) according security management. - Clearing status Indicates if the alarm condition is terminated (CLR) or is still active (NCLR). If cleared it has a green background, - Acknowledge status Indicates if the alarm has been acknowledge (ACK) with the button on the COMPACT ADM unit or not (NACK). - Correlated Not used notification flag - Repetition counter Not used The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operation. Table 6. Supply general indications of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions that can be done with the information given in the applications. The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected. External Points alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They are available for the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector. Detailed description of this application is given in the AS Operator's Handbook. Table 6. General aspect of alarms meaning and relevant maintenance actions
PROBABLE CAUSE NAME AND/OR ACRONYM OF DISPLAYED ALARM Loss of signal (LOS) Check line Transmitter Signal (TF) Replace unit
MAINTENANCE
Transmitter degraded (TD)
Replace unit when possible (laser degrade)
Loss of frame (LOF) AIS Excessive BER (EBER)
Check line (alignment problems due to line error) Check connected equipment Check line (excessive line BER)
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
20/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Degraded Signal (DS) Loss of Pointer (LOP) Payload Mismatch (PLM) Far End Received Failure (FERF) Server Signal Failure (SSF) Frequency offset (DRIFT) Loss of timing source (LOSS) Resource Isolation Communication Subsystem Isolation (CSF) Unequipped (U) Referred to Signal Label Unconfigured Equipment Present (UEP) Internal Communication Problem URU - Underlying Resource Unavailable
Check line (line signal degrade) Check line Configuration error Check far-end equipment Check the entire TU path. Alarm indicates AIS signal received on the TU Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check reference and connection between it and the equipment Check connection between NE and Craft Terminal Check Communication configuration (LAPD) Configuration error Unit inserted but not declared Reset NE. If persists substitute Compact ADM unit Insert the board
PM_AS- Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis CPE-Communication protocol error
Check path / line section interested to the indication.
LOMF - Loss Of MultiFrame PTM- Path Trace Mismatch AUXP Remote Node Transmission error (RNTE)
Check payload structure Not operative in current release Check far-end equipment Check far-end equipment
Unit missing (RUM) Unit Problem (RUP) Unit type mismatch (RUTM) Version mismatch (VM) Cooling Fans Failure (CFF) Power Problem (POP) LAN problem (LAN) Internal communication problem (ICP)
ED
01
Check MSP protocol (architecture type, switch fail)
Board alarms Insert missing unit Replace unit Insert right unit (unit inserted into a slot set with another type of unit) Update software version by means of download Check the fan units and substitute the faulty one Substitute the board Check LAN interconnection or substitute CONGI unit Internal dialogue problem in the SYNTH unit. It indicates a temporary condition, which will be restored. If the condition persists it is due to a unit hardware failure: in this case it will activate the RUP alarm
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
21/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.4.5 Port View alarms It is also possible to analyze the detailed alarm presence on the TPs of each ports of the NE, following the indication of the Port View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. Figure 7. To Figure 9 is an example of a Port view. For each TP of the Port a detail of the relevant alarms is presented. On the port view the messages displayed at the bottom provide information about: - MSP protection (if enable) - Automatic Laser Shutdown state - State of the connection for Ethernet port (available only if an Ethernet port has been selected) A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color and a "- " sign in the box. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP) and an "X" signs in the box. The alarms, which can be found in the Port view, are listed in Table 7. Where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. The information regarding ALS states and Laser state useful for operators safety purpose are reported in the following: ALS states: Inactive = No ALS has been activated (Off) or the laser has been Forced ON/OFF. In test = the laser restart has been automatically activated. Active = The ALS has been activated (O n). Undefined = The ALS is not present (not created). Laser state: On = all OK or ALS not present (not created). Off = Laser off (when ALS is created). Forced on = ALS forced on by operator command. Forced off = ALS forced off by operator command.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
22/44
Figure 7. Example of SDH Port View alarms (with MSP schema)
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
23/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 8. Example of ATM Port View alarms
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
24/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 9. Example of Ethernet Port View alarms
5.4.6 Board view alarms and states The alarm and status indications at Board level can be obtained, following the indication of the Board View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. The alarm and status indications depend on the unit type; for example SDH units is organized on two levels of presentation (in the first is selected one of the available ports) and each view contains dedicated indications. An alarm box is displayed on each port, to indicate whether the port is alarmed. ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
25/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
An indication in the "message/status area" provides information about the board Administrative State: "in-service" or "out-of-service". The alarms of the board are reported at the bottom of the "message/status area", by means of various boxes containing relevant acronyms. The non-alarmed condition of an alarm icon is represented by a green color. The alarmed condition is represented by the color of its severity (as assigned by the ASAP). A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object. In the view is present the Administrative State information: "in service" or "out of service". The alarms, which can be found in the Board view, are listed in Table 7., where the relevant maintenance actions are reported too. In the view can also be present EPS indications.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
26/44
Figure 10. Example of SDH Board View alarms and status
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
27/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 11. Example of PDH Board View alarms and status
5.4.7 Subrack and Rack view alarms The alarms and status indications at subrack and rack level can be obtained, following the indications given on the previous Section of this Handbook ("NE management"). An alarm box is displayed on each board, to indicate whether the board is alarmed. This board alarm summarization is activated when one of the board alarms (those reported at the bottom of the Board view) is active. A "lock" symbol on a board indicates that it is "in-service". Else, the lack of this symbol indicates its "out-of-service" state. (Administrative State information). A message under the mouse indicator provides the name of the alarm or object on which it is located, in this way facilitating the identification of the alarm or status or object.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
28/44
Figure 12. Example of Subrack view alarms and status
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
29/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 13. Example of Rack view alarm and status
5.4.8 Fans Subrack alarms view To obtain Fan Subrack alarms indications click twice with the mouse on the relevant subrack drawing in the rack level view. • •
•
ED
Battery Failure (BF): check that the station battery cables are right connected Cabling Problem (CAP): check that the alarms cable between the Fans Subrack and the CONGI unit is right connected; check also the configuration in the Equipment menu. (Connected FAN to CONGI#10 or connected FAN to CONGI#12) Temperature Out Of Range (TOOR): verify the Fan unit alarm and in presence of faulty substitute the relevant unit; clean also the Dust filter if necessary. 01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
30/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 14. Fans subrack alarms view
5.4.9 Equipment View alarms The alarm indications at Equipment level can be obtained, following the indication of the Equipment View chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. • •
ED
Fuse Failure (FF): Substitute the fuse in the CONGI unit and search for a cause AND Battery Failure (ABF): Failure of the Service Power Supply connected to the CONGI Rack connector. 01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
31/44
• •
Backplane Failure (BKF): Substitute the Termination BUS Specific Hardware Diagnostic (SDH): Indicate the presence of link failure between the MATRIX and one of the units; for details choose the Internal Link Monitor option of the Diagnosis menu.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
These alarms can be observed at OS level.
Figure 15. Example of Equipment View alarms and status
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
32/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
5.4.10 External Points alarms (Housekeeping) The alarms and status indications relevant to External Points (housekeeping) can be obtained, following the indication of the External Points chapter on the previous Section of this Handbook. The external state represents the alarm state. "On" when the alarm is raised, else "Off". If the external point is active (On), a red flag is represented near the state of the concerned point. In case of input point the alarm state is reported also in the user label column, by the box near its name: Green color and sign "- " ---> means non-alarmed condition. The change of color, as assigned by the severity (ASAP) ---> means alarmed condition.
Figure 16. Example of External Points alarms and status
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
33/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
6
Unit replacement with a spare
No particular indication is given as to spare handling, which is left to the Maintenance Administration. The replacement procedures are executed as follows: - Hardware set the spare unit exactly as the unit to replace. Settings are specified in the MS documents. Here a layout figure indicates the exact location of all the setting arrangements and a table relates the operations to achieve with the settings. The cited documents are enclosed in the Technical Handbook. - Simply replace those units not provided with any software settings - With regard to the COMPACT ADM (also called SYNTH or SYNTHN) unit refer to paragraph 6.. - With regard to the ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit refer to paragraph 6.2. - With regard to the IP MATRIX unit refer to paragraph 6.3. - When upgrading equipment with “New Hardware”(for example SYNTHN unit) that substitutes the old units (for example SYNTH unit), follow the indication given in paragraph 7. WARNING: In order to avoid short Circuit, before substituting the CONGI unit, Switch--off the relevant Station battery fuse breaker. Subsequently remove the Station Battery cable and extract the CONGI unit.
WARNING: before inserting the new spare unit carefully checks the integrity of the relative connectors. Don’t insert the units that have been damaged during the transport/storing or in a phase before their replacing.
6.1
COMPACT ADM unit replacement
N.B. In this paragraph for COMPACT ADM is generically intended one of the following unit: - SYNTH16 - SYNTH16N Various procedures are utilized to replace a COMPACT ADM faulty unit. They depend on the following maintenance conditions: - EPS protection of the COMPACT ADM unit • EPS present or not (typically present) • Failure on the Main board • Failure on the Spare board - Type of spares available: • Spare without software installed. This is the normal condition. • Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment and with SW release identical to the unit to replace. • Spares with installed software, belonging to the same type of equipment but with SW release differing from the one of the unit to replace, or belonging to other types of equipment or unknown. - CONGI unit version (read NOTES in Figure 17. and Figure 18.) - MIB store in the Craft Terminal or O.S. ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
34/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
The flow charts of Figure 17. And Figure 18. Illustrates the procedures to follow For the COMPACT ADM substitution. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults; when not possible this is indicated in the flow chart.
Replacement problems: When replacing the COMPACT ADM unit the traffic of the two SDH ports is lost when not SNCP protected. Then it is suggested to replace in low traffic condition.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
35/44
Figure 17. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS protected)
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
36/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 18. COMPACT ADM unit replacement (EPS not protected)
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
37/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
6.2
ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement
different procedures are available for ATM MATRIX 4X4 substitution according to the EPS schema. The flow-charts of Figure 19. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is not EPS protected. The flow-charts of Figure 20. Illustrates the procedures to follow for the ATM MATRIX 4X4 when it is EPS protected. The procedure aim is to replace the faulty unit without causing configuration changes and/or unwanted faults. All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Two
Figure 19. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement without EPS protection
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
38/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 20. ATM MATRIX 4X4 unit replacement with EPS protection
6.3
IP MATRIX unit replacement
For IP MATRIX unit replacement refer to the specific Operator’s Handbook.
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
39/44
7
UPGRADING WITH NEW HARDWARE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
In the next paragraphs is indicated the procedure to follow when upgrading an equipment with “New Hardware”. The new Hardware is identifying by the “N”letter at the end of the acronym unit (for example SYNTHN is the new version, SYNTH without “N”is the old version). This procedure permits, if the equipment is EPS protected and inserted in a protected network (linear or ring protection), to maintain the system “in service”. 7.1
SYNTH substitution with SYNTHN
According to the EPS and SNCP SYNTH protection scheme different procedure are available: [1] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected
Substituting the old SYNTH all the traffic is lost! • • • • •
ED
Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6, follow the instruction described in Figure 21.. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
40/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 21. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS not protected [2] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected
Supposing that the STM-16 ports are not network protected, their traffic will be lost during the substitution; the traffic of all the other board will not be lost. • ED
Remove first the old SYNTH in slot 15 from the subrack
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
41/44
• • •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • • • • • •
ED
Insert the new SYNTHN into the subrack slot 15; a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 15 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTH acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear Force the EPS Switching on SYNTHN in slot 15 by selecting the Switch option from the EPS menu. For details see the paragraph “Switching EPS”in the “NE MANAGEMENT” section of this Handbook. Remove the old SYNTH in slot 6 from the subrack Before inserting the new SYNTHN in subrack slot 6, follow the instruction described in Figure 22.. At the end of the procedure a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the SYNTHN unit in slot 6 Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the SYNTHN acronym from the list then click on ok. Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
42/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 22. Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected
[3] Upgrading with a new SYNTHN EPS protected with STM-N ports SNCP protected
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
43/44
The procedure is the same of that described on point [2]. But without traffic interruption on the STM-16 ports present on the SYNTH because SNCP protected. 7.2
P4S1, S-41, L-41, L-42 substitution with P4S1N, S-41N, L-41N, L-42N
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
During the substitution the traffic carried by the units will be lost if not SNCP protected. In the following an example will be given substituting a P4S1 with a P4S1N; the same procedure can be applied to substitute the S-41, L-41, L-42 units respectively with S-41N, L-41N, L-42N units. • Remove the old unit (example P4S1) from the subrack • Insert the new unit (example P4S1N) into the subrack slot previously occupied by the old unit; on Craft Terminal a RUTM (unit type mismatch) alarm will be present. • On Craft Terminal in the Subrack level view select the slot where the new unit has been inserted • Select the Modify option from the Equipment menu and select the acronym of the new unit (in our example P4S1N) from the list, then click on ok. • Verify that the RUTM alarm disappear
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
01
SC.4 : NE MAINTENANCE
3AL 98104 ADAA
44/44
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Operator Handbook
Alcatel 1662SMC Rel2.1 Download and SIBDL Configuration
01
2004-04-21
Creation
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
Distribution: Internal
ED
01
External
Ma Jing APPROVED BY
PREPARED BY
√
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
1/16
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES .................................................................. 3 1
INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................... 4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................... 4 1.1.1 Document scope ............................................................................................................... 4 1.1.2 Target audience................................................................................................................ 4 1.2 TERMINOLOGY ...................................................................................................................... 4 1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations............................................................................................ 4 1.2.2 Glossary of terms............................................................................................................. 4 2
DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL.................................................................................................... 5 2.1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE ................................................................................................ 5 2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure ............................................................................................ 5
3
CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL .......................................................................................... 11 3.1 PURPOSE OF THE PROCEDURE .............................................................................................. 11 3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment)..... 11 3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment ............................... 11 3.1.3 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment ............................ 12
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
2/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure - step 1 .................................................................................... 6 Figure 2. SIBDL download procedure - step 2 .................................................................................... 7 Figure 3. SIBDL download procedure - step 3 .................................................................................... 8 Figure 4. SIBDL download procedure - step 4 .................................................................................... 8 Figure 5. SIBDL download procedure - step 5 .................................................................................... 9 Figure 6. SIBDL download procedure - step 6 .................................................................................... 9 Figure 7. SIBDL download procedure - step 7 .................................................................................. 10 Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 1........................................................................ 12 Figure 9. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 2........................................................................ 14 Figure 10. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 3...................................................................... 14 Figure 11. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 4...................................................................... 15 Figure 12. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 5...................................................................... 16
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
3/16
1
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Scope
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
1.1.1 Document scope The SIBDL Manual describes the SIBDL application, used to download the NE software via Q or F interface. The SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) procedure contains the following operative descriptions: • •
Download with SIBDL. The comple te procedure is indicated. See Chapter on page Configuration for SIBDL. Configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation are described.
1.1.2 Target audience The SIBDL Manual is intended for all users. The documents that should be read before starting this document are: •
1.2
1320CT Rel. 1.1 Basic Operator's Handbook Terminology
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations Refer to the Section Introduction manual. 1.2.2 Glossary of terms Refer to the Section Introduction manual.
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
4/16
2
DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL
2.1
Purpose of the procedure
This procedure describes how to download NE software with the SIBDL (Standard Image Binary Download) program.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2.1.1 SIBDL download procedure Download with SIBDL program is performed in the following phases: • •
Turn on phase, when activating the NE. Maintenance phase, when substituting the COMPACT ADM unit with a spare, and the spare one don’t contain software. ATTENTION:
Download with SIBDL program put the COMPACT ADM unit out of service regarding to the supervision and control function, while the traffic is not lost. It must not be executed to download a spare unit that contains software; in this case use the Download option of the EML-USM, presented in the previous section. SIBDL tool permits to download the software towards the NE using the Q interface (Ethernet connection) or the F interface RS232 (serial line) of the NE. When using the Q interface the time necessary to the operation is reduced to some minute. WARNING: In Windows NT environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL: • •
TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the NT Administrator. RAS (Remote Access Service) and Serial Cable Modem.
In Windows 2000 environment, it should have configured, before to use SIBDL: • •
TCP/IP protocol, Protocol Service, TEL NET Accessory, defined by the NT Administrator. Serial Cable Modem refer in Para Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows 2000 environment N.B.
RAS (Remote Access Service) is not necessary in Windows 2000 environment
To download with SIBDL execute the following steps: 1) Connect the Craft Terminal with the NE: • •
ED
When download by means of Q interface, always connect both the F and Q interface. When download by means of F interface, connect only the F interface.
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
5/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
2) Start SIBDL, selecting Start > Program>Alcatel>SIBDL"version">SIBDL 3) In the screen, which appears (see Figure 1.) with the command menu, select "automatic mode" commands typing 8 and then ENTER.
Figure 1. SIBDL download procedure - step 1
4) In the field "source file" at the bottom write the path name of the NE descriptor file (see Figure 2.). The path name has typically the following format (see the example in the figure): // Note: In current release it is possible to download two types of file descriptor according to the following rules: 1. Create the NE software package as explained in the paragraph "NE Software package installation procedure" NE MANAGEMENT of this Manual. 2. If the software to download manage only the SDH functionality, select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC (example: /ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2.1b.09/1662.dsc) 3. If the software to download manage the SDH+ATM/IP functionality, select the file descriptor in the directory 1662SMC(example:/ALCATEL/Q3CT_Pv1.3.05/FTservices/data/1662SMC/2.1b.09/1662.d sc)
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
6/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 2. SIBDL download procedure - step 2
5) Press ENTER 6) This step (see Figure 3.) asks for the "IP Address" insertion. In the field "NE_IP_address [PPP TEL NET]" at the bottom: - With F interface: write PPP and press ENTER - With Q interface: •
First possibility: write TELNET and press ENTER In next step, which appears, write the IP Address of the Craft Terminal
•
ED
Second possibility: write the IP Address of the NE and press ENTER
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
7/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 3. SIBDL download procedure - step 3
7) This step (see Figure 4.) asks if the flash card must be formatted. Type "y" to format the flash card; as result of this action the program ask for a confirmation (see Figure 5.)
Figure 4. SIBDL download procedure - ste p 4
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
8/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 5. SIBDL download procedure - step 5
8) Type "y”. The screen shows the automatic download evolution with a final message indicating the completed download (see Figure 6.). On the contrary repeat the procedure.
Figure 6. SIBDL download procedure - step 6
9) Press ENTER. 10) In the presented screen type 4 (see Figure 7.) and ENTER.
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
9/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 7. SIBDL download procedure - step 7
11) Extract and re- insert the EQUICO unit to complete the operation. 12) Extract and re- insert again the EQUICO unit to complete the operation 13) Run the 1320CT application, execute Start supervision and NE login 14) From Craft Terminal (EML-USM view) execute the normal download procedure: N.B. Check that no RUTM alarm is present in the slot reserved to the main MATRIXN. If RUTM alarm is present means the board type inserted in t he subrack (typically MATRIXN in this release) and the board type software configured (typically MATRIX) is not the same; under this condition the user must change the board type with the Equipment->Set menu. - Select Init download from Download menu - Select the SW package to Download and click on OK button In this condition the download is executed immedia tely - Select Unit info from Download menu - Select the Software Package loaded as explained above and activate it - Press OK to complete the operation In this condition the download is executed immediately.
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
10/16
3
CONFIGURATION FOR SIBDL
3.1
Purpose of the procedure
This chapter describes the configurations to be performed for SIBDL operation.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
3.1.1 Remote Access Service configuration (only needed for Windows NT environment) To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges and need the installation CDROM of Windows NT, then execute: • • • • •
Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon; Double click on "Network" icon; Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window and push the button "Add": start the "Select Network Service" window; Select Remote Access Service (RAS) in the dialog box; Follow the instructions.
3.1.2 Serial Cable Modem configuration for Windows NT environment To install a new modem, the user should have administrator privileges, then execute: • •
Double click on "My computer" icon on the PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon; Double click on "Network" icon; Select the folder "Services" in the "Network" window;
• • • • • •
Select "Remote Access Service" and push button "Properties...” Push the button "add" in "Remote Access Setup" window; Push the button "Install Modem" in "Add RAS Device" window: start the "Install New Modem" window; Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem; I will select him from a list" and push the "Next > " button; Push the button "Have disk...”start the window Install from disk; Push the button "Browse... Search the folder where SIBDL is installed (Alcatel / SIBDL "version" / SIBDL /) and select the file "mdmalca.inf", after push the button "Open";
•
Push the button "OK" in window "Install from disk"; Select the modem named "Serial cable" in the dialog box of window "Install New Modem" and push the button "Next >"; Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the port must be available, i.e. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >";
• • •
ED
Follow the instructions; Push the button "OK" in "Add RAS Device" window; Push the button "Continue" in "Remote Access Setup" window; 01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
11/16
•
Push the button "OK" in "Network" window;
3.1.3 Serial Cable Mode m configuration for Windows 2000 environment To install a new modem, you should have administrator privileges; •
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
• • •
Double click on "My computer" icon on your PC desktop and double click on "Control panel" icon; Double click on "Phone and Modem Options" icon and select the "Modems" folder; Push the button "Add": "Add/Remove Hardware Wizard: Install New Modem" window will appear; Put a tick against "Don't detect my modem; I will select it from a list" and push the button "Next >";
Figure 8. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 1 • • • •
ED
Push the button "Have disk...”the window "Install from disk" will appear; Push the button "Browse..." Search the folder where SIBDL is installed and select the file "mdmalca.inf", after push the button "Open"; Push the button "OK" on the "Install from disk" window; 01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
12/16
Select the modem named "Serial cable" into dialog box from "Install New Modem" window and push the button "Next >";
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
13/16
Figure 9. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 2
Put a tick against "Selected ports" and select only one port (the serial port must be available, i.e. not used by another RAS modem) and push the button "Next >";
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
•
Figure 10. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 3 •
ED
The window "Digital Signature Not found" will appear: push the button "Yes", and after the button "Finish" to end modem installation;
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
14/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
Figure 11. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 4 •
ED
At the end, the "Phone and Modem Options" window will display the installed modem
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
15/16
Figure 12. Serial Cable Modem configuration - step 5
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
01
SC.5: SIBDL
3AL 98104 ADAA
16/16
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization.
View more...
Comments
